You are on page 1of 134

AWS D14.4/D14.

4M:2005
An American National Standard

Specification for
Welded Joints in
Machinery and
Equipment

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
Key Words Classification, equipment, inspection AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
and weld repair, joint design, An American National Standard
machinery
Approved by
American National Standards Institute
June 10, 2005

Specification for
Welded Joints in
Machinery and Equipment

3rd Edition

Supersedes ANSI/AWS D14.4-97

Prepared by
AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment

Under the Direction of


AWS Technical Activities Committee

Approved by
AWS Board of Directors

Abstract
This specification establishes common acceptance criteria for classifying and applying carbon and low-alloy steel
welded joints used in the manufacture of machines and equipment. It also covers weld joint design, workmanship, qual-
ity control requirements and procedures, welding operator and welding procedure qualification, weld joint inspection
(visual, radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle, liquid penetrant), repair of weld defects, and heat treatment.

550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
Statement on Use of AWS American National Standards
All standards (codes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American
Welding Society (AWS) are voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rules of the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI). When AWS standards are either incorporated in, or made part of,
documents that are included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulations of other governmental bodies,
their provisions carry the full legal authority of the statute. In such cases, any changes in those AWS standards must be
approved by the governmental body having statutory jurisdiction before they can become a part of those laws and
regulations. In all cases, these standards carry the full legal authority of the contract or other document that invokes the
AWS standards. Where this contractual relationship exists, changes in or deviations from requirements of an AWS
standard must be by agreement between the contracting parties.
International Standard Book Number: 0-87171-733-6
American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126
2005 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America
AWS American National Standards are developed through a consensus standards development process that brings
together volunteers representing varied viewpoints and interests to achieve consensus. While AWS administers the process
and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of consensus, it does not independently test, evaluate, or
verify the accuracy of any information or the soundness of any judgments contained in its standards.
AWS disclaims liability for any injury to persons or to property, or other damages of any nature whatsoever, whether spe-
cial, indirect, consequential or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of, or reliance on this
standard. AWS also makes no guaranty or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of any information published herein.
In issuing and making this standard available, AWS is not undertaking to render professional or other services for or on
behalf of any person or entity. Nor is AWS undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone
else. Anyone using these documents should rely on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice
of a competent professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances.
This standard may be superseded by the issuance of new editions. Users should ensure that they have the latest edition.
Publication of this standard does not authorize infringement of any patent or trade name. Users of this standard accept
any and all liabilities for infringement of any patent or trade name items. AWS disclaims liability for the infringement of
any patent or product trade name resulting from the use of this standard.
Finally, AWS does not monitor, police, or enforce compliance with this standard, nor does it have the power to do so.
On occasion, text, tables, or figures are printed incorrectly, constituting errata. Such errata, when discovered, are posted
on the AWS web page (www.aws.org).
Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may only be obtained by sending a request, in writ-
ing, to the Managing Director, Technical Services Division, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL
33126 (see Annex A). With regard to technical inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS standards
may be rendered. However, such opinions represent only the personal opinions of the particular individuals giving them. These
individuals do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions constitute official or unofficial opinions or interpreta-
tions of AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should not be used as a substitute for an official interpretation.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment. It must be
reviewed every five years, and if not revised, it must be either reaffirmed or withdrawn. Comments (recommendations,
additions, or deletions) and any pertinent data that may be of use in improving this standard are required and should be
addressed to AWS Headquarters. Such comments will receive careful consideration by the AWS D14 Committee on
Machinery and Equipment and the author of the comments will be informed of the Committees response to the
comments. Guests are invited to attend all meetings of the AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment to
express their comments verbally. Procedures for appeal of an adverse decision concerning all such comments are
provided in the Rules of Operation of the Technical Activities Committee. A copy of these Rules can be obtained from
the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.
Photocopy Rights
Authorization to photocopy items for internal, personal, or educational classroom use only, or the internal, personal, or
educational classroom use only of specific clients, is granted by the American Welding Society (AWS) provided that the
appropriate fee is paid to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: 978-750-8400;
online: http://www.copyright.com.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Dedication

This edition of AWS D14.4 is dedicated to the memory of


Bob Bartifay, who, thanks to his efforts, contributions,
and many years of dedication to the AWS D14 Commit-
tee and its subcommittees, helped lay the foundation for
the content of many D14 standards.
Bob was a metallurgist who worked for the Aluminum
Company of America and spent many years on the study
of welding and welding-related projects. His extensive
knowledge of welding and metallurgy helped develop
many of the AWS D14 specifications.
He served as both Chair and Vice Chair on the D14
Committee and many of its subcommittees and devoted
many years of service to the writing and publishing of
our specifications.
Bob was both a friend and mentor to all of us and will be
greatly missed.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

iii
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

This page is intentionally blank.

iv
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Personnel
AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment
J. L. Warren, Chair CNH America LLC
D. J. Malito, 1st Vice Chair Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
L. L. Schweinegruber, 2nd Vice Chair Robinson Industries, Incorporated
P. Howe, Secretary American Welding Society
D. B. Ashley Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection & Insurance Company
B. K. Banzhaf CNH America LLC
P. W. Cameron Crenlo, Incorporated
P. Collins WeldCon Engineering
*R. T. Hemzacek Consultant
B. D. Horn Consultant
D. J. Landon Vermeer Manufacturing Company
T. J. Landon Chicago Bridge & Iron Company
M. R. Malito Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
*G. W. Martens Grove Worldwide, Incorporated, Manitowoc Crane Group
D. C. Martinez Danmar Engineering Company, Incorporated
A. R. Mellini Mellini & Associates, Incorporated
*H. W. Mishler Consultant
R. E. Munson M&M Engineering
J. G. Nelson TRW Incorporated
A. R. Olsen ARO Testing, Incorporated
C. R. Reynolds Deere & Company
*P. J. Palzkill Consultant
W. A. Svekric Welding Consultants, Incorporated
E. G. Yevick Weld-Met International, Incorporated
V. R. Zegers R. E. Technical Services, Incorporated

AWS D14B Subcommittee on General Design and Practices


D. J. Malito, Chair Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
P. Howe, Secretary American Welding Society
D. B. Ashley Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection & Insurance Company
B. K. Banzhaf CNH America LLC
P. W. Cameron Crenlo, Incorporated
D. J. Landon Vermeer Manufacturing Company
M. R. Malito Girard Machine Company, Incorporated
D. C. Martinez Danmar Engineering Company, Incorporated
*H. W. Mishler Consultant
A. R. Olsen ARO Testing, Incorporated
*J. L. Warren CNH America LLC
P. Xu Link Belt C. E. Company
*E. G. Yevick Weld-Met International, Incorporated
*V. R. Zegers R. E. Technical Services, Incorporated
*Advisor

v
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

This page is intentionally blank.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

vi
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Foreword
(This Foreword is not a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005, Specification for Welded Joints
in Machinery and Equipment, but is included for informational purposes only.)

This standard was initially developed in 1966 to provide the user with a single document covering all aspects of the
welding of machinery and equipment. Over time, other standards for specific areas in the machinery and equipment field
were developed, and this document then served as a supplement document to these standards and continued to provide a
basis for other areas in the machinery and equipment field not served by a specific standard.
This document is still intended to be referenced by all machinery and equipment subcommittees such as cranes, earth
moving equipment, machine tools, presses, and rotating equipment, and to be utilized in the preparation of new and
revised codes and specifications. Thus, as the purpose of this document has undergone a subtle change, the committee
has changed the title of this document to Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment from its former
title of Classification of Welded Joints for Machinery and Equipment.
The purpose of this specification is not to restrict the use of other proven methods and procedures for welding of
machinery and equipment. Where such methods and procedures exist, this standard should be referenced as a supplement.
This third edition includes corrections, updated data, clarifications, methods of removal and repair of weld defects,
and additional information to make this specification more complete for its intended use.
Comments and suggestions for the improvement of this standard are welcome. They should be sent to the Secretary,
AWS D14 Committee on Machinery and Equipment, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL
33136.
Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may only be obtained by sending a
request, in writing, to the Managing Director, Technical Services Division, American Welding Society. A formal reply
will be issued after it has been reviewed by the appropriate personnel following established procedures. Guidelines for
technical inquiries regarding AWS standards are shown in Annex B.
This document will be reviewed periodically to assure its success in serving all parties concerned with its provisions.
Revisions will be issued when warranted.
This third edition of the specification is dedicated to the memory of Bob Bartifay.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

vii
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

This page is intentionally blank.

viii
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table of Contents
Page No.
Personnel......................................................................................................................................................................v
Foreword ....................................................................................................................................................................vii
List of Tables ..............................................................................................................................................................xii
List of Figures........................................................................................................................................................... xiii
1. Scope .....................................................................................................................................................................1
2. Normative References ...........................................................................................................................................1
3. Definitions.............................................................................................................................................................2
4. Classification of Welded Joints.............................................................................................................................3
4.1 Joint Classes ................................................................................................................................................3
4.2 Intermittent Welded Joints...........................................................................................................................3
4.3 Quality Control Requirements.....................................................................................................................3
5. Welded Joint Design .............................................................................................................................................3
5.1 Stresses in Weld Metal ................................................................................................................................3
5.2 Fatigue Stress Provisions.............................................................................................................................3
5.3 Combined Unit Stresses and Toughness Requirements ..............................................................................6
5.4 Filler Metals.................................................................................................................................................6
5.5 Lap Joints.....................................................................................................................................................6
5.6 Corner and T-Joints ...................................................................................................................................12
5.7 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds in Dynamic Applications ..............................................................12
5.8 Combinations of Welds .............................................................................................................................15
5.9 Welds in Combination with Rivets and Bolts ...........................................................................................15
5.10 Fillet Weld Details.....................................................................................................................................15
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

5.11 Eccentricity of Connections.......................................................................................................................15


5.12 Connections or Splices in Tension and Compression Members ...............................................................16
5.13 Connections or Splices in Compression Members with Milled Joints ......................................................16
5.14 Connections of Components of Built-Up Members ..................................................................................16
5.15 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints ...................................................................................16
5.16 Girders and Beams.....................................................................................................................................16
5.17 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths, and Throats.............................................................................................18
5.18 Fillers .........................................................................................................................................................20
5.19 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Weld Restrictions ..................................................................................20
5.20 Joint Qualification .....................................................................................................................................20
5.21 Details of Fillet Welds ...............................................................................................................................21
5.22 Details of Plug and Slot Welds..................................................................................................................21
5.23 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds................................................................................................22
5.24 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds.....................................................................................................24
6. Workmanship ......................................................................................................................................................24
6.1 General.......................................................................................................................................................24
6.2 Preparation of Materials ............................................................................................................................24
6.3 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................25

ix
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Page No.
7. Qualification........................................................................................................................................................26
Part AGeneral Qualification Requirements ....................................................................................................26
7.1 Approved Procedures.................................................................................................................................26
7.2 Other Procedures .......................................................................................................................................26
7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders ......................................................................................26
7.4 Qualification Responsibility ......................................................................................................................27
Part BWelding Procedure Qualification .........................................................................................................27
7.5 General.......................................................................................................................................................27
7.6 Limitation of Variables..............................................................................................................................27
7.7 Types of Tests and Purposes......................................................................................................................30
7.8 Base Metal and Its Preparation ..................................................................................................................30
7.9 Position of Test Welds...............................................................................................................................31
7.10 Production of Test Samples .......................................................................................................................34
7.11 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation....................................................................................34
7.12 Method of Testing Specimens ...................................................................................................................35
7.13 Test Results Required ................................................................................................................................42
7.14 Records ......................................................................................................................................................45
7.15 Retests........................................................................................................................................................45
Part CWelder Qualification.............................................................................................................................45
7.16 General.......................................................................................................................................................45
7.17 Qualification Tests Required .....................................................................................................................45
7.18 Limitation of Variables..............................................................................................................................45
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Unlimited Thickness .................................................46
7.20 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate of Limited Thickness.....................................................46
7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing .....................47
7.22 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, or K-Connections on Pipe or Square or Rectangular
Tubing........................................................................................................................................................47
7.23 Fillet Weld Qualification Test ...................................................................................................................47
7.24 Positions of Test Welds .............................................................................................................................48
7.25 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................49
7.26 Welding Procedure ....................................................................................................................................49
7.27 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation....................................................................................49
7.28 Method of Testing Specimens ...................................................................................................................50
7.29 Test Results Required ................................................................................................................................53
7.30 Retests........................................................................................................................................................56
7.31 Period of Effectiveness ..............................................................................................................................56
7.32 Records ......................................................................................................................................................56

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Part DWelding Operator Qualification...........................................................................................................56
7.33 General.......................................................................................................................................................56
7.34 Limitation of Variables..............................................................................................................................58
7.35 Qualification Tests Required .....................................................................................................................58
7.36 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................59
7.37 Welding Procedure ....................................................................................................................................59
7.38 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation....................................................................................59
7.39 Test Results Required ................................................................................................................................60
7.40 Retests........................................................................................................................................................60
7.41 Period of Effectiveness ..............................................................................................................................60
7.42 Records ......................................................................................................................................................60
Part EQualification of Tack Welders ..............................................................................................................60
7.43 General.......................................................................................................................................................60
7.44 Limitation of Variables..............................................................................................................................60

x
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Page No.
7.45 Qualification Tests Required .....................................................................................................................60
7.46 Base Metal .................................................................................................................................................60
7.47 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation....................................................................................60
7.48 Method of Testing Specimens ...................................................................................................................61
7.49 Test Results Required ................................................................................................................................61
7.50 Retests........................................................................................................................................................61
7.51 Period of Effectiveness ..............................................................................................................................62
7.52 Records ......................................................................................................................................................62
8. Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................62
8.1 Visual Inspection .......................................................................................................................................62
8.2 Radiographic Inspection ............................................................................................................................66
8.3 Ultrasonic Inspection .................................................................................................................................74
8.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection .....................................................................................................................85
8.5 Liquid Penetrant Inspection.......................................................................................................................87
9. Repair ..................................................................................................................................................................88
9.1 Weld Repairs .............................................................................................................................................88
9.2 Base Metal Repairs ....................................................................................................................................89
9.3 Repair Procedure .......................................................................................................................................90
10. Postweld Treatments ...........................................................................................................................................90
10.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................90
10.2 Thermal Residual Stress Reduction...........................................................................................................91
10.3 Peening ......................................................................................................................................................91
10.4 Vibratory Conditioning..............................................................................................................................92
Mandatory Annex .......................................................................................................................................................93
Annex IPrequalified Weld Joints ............................................................................................................................93
Nonmandatory Annexes............................................................................................................................................104
Annex AGuidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for AWS Technical Committees ..............................113
Annex BBibliography ............................................................................................................................................115

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
List of AWS Documents on Machinery and Equipment............................................................................................117

xi
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

List of Tables
Table Page No.
1 Weld Inspection Requirements ......................................................................................................................6
2 Maximum Allowable Stress in Weld Metal...................................................................................................9
3 Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range in Tables 4 and 5 ..........................................10
4 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Redundant Load Path Structures........................................................13
5 Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Non-Redundant Load Path Structures ...............................................14
6 Base Metal and Filler Metal Relationship....................................................................................................15
7 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds ..............................................................................................19
8 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Prequalified Joints ......................................................................................23
9 Minimum Size of Full Strength Double Fillet Welds ..................................................................................23
10 Minimum Weld Size for Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds...............................................................24
11 Maximum Allowable Chemical Composition Limits for Steels Prequalified for Welding.........................27
12 Procedure QualificationType and Position Limitations...........................................................................34
13 Procedure QualificationNumber and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of Thickness
Qualified for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds ............................................................................39
14 Procedure QualificationNumber and Type of Test Specimens Required and Range of Thickness
Qualified for Fillet Welds ............................................................................................................................42
15 Welder and Welding Operator QualificationType and Position Limitations ..........................................54
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

16 Welder and Welding Operator QualificationNumber and Type of Specimens Required and
Range of Thickness Qualified......................................................................................................................55
17 Acceptance Criteria for Visual Inspection ...................................................................................................63
18 Standard Hole-Type and Wire Image Quality Indicator Requirements.......................................................67
19 Examples of Acceptable Indications............................................................................................................71
20 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Cut Edge Discontinuities of Plate ..................................................89

xii
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

List of Figures
Figure Page No.
1 Classification of Welded Joints......................................................................................................................4
2 Illustrative Examples for Table 3...................................................................................................................7
3 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Redundant Structures..................................................13
4 Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Non-Redundant Structures .........................................14
5 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plate of Contact ..................................................................15
6 Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness................................................17
7 Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width ............................................................18
8 Combination of Bevel Groove and Fillet Weld Profiles..............................................................................19
9 Splices or Connections with Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. [6 mm] Thick .........................................................20
10 Splices or Connections with Fillers 1/4 in. [6 mm] or Thicker....................................................................21
11 Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds ...........................................................................................................22
12 Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints ..............................................................26
13 Positions of Groove Welds ..........................................................................................................................32
14 Positions of Fillet Welds ..............................................................................................................................33
15 Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds ..................................................................................................35
16 Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds ....................................................................................36
17 Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds ......................................................................................................37
18 Positions of Test Pipe for Fillet Welds ........................................................................................................38

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
19 Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for 2 in. [50 mm] or 3 in. [75 mm]
Diameter Pipe...............................................................................................................................................38
20 Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for 6 in. [150 mm] or 8 in. [200 mm]
Diameter Pipe...............................................................................................................................................40
21 Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for Electroslag and Electrogas
Welded Plate ................................................................................................................................................40
22 Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate Over
3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick ..................................................................................................................................41
23 Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for Welded Test Plate
3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick ..................................................................................................................................41
24 Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Plate to Plate) ......................................................43
25 Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Pipe) ........................................................44
26 Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Plate) .......................................................44
27 Welder QualificationTest Plate for Unlimited Thickness........................................................................46
28 Welder QualificationOptional Test Plate for Unlimited ThicknessHorizontal Position......................47
29 Welder QualificationTest Plate for Limited ThicknessFlat Position ...................................................48
30 Welder QualificationOptional Test Plate for Limited ThicknessHorizontal Position .........................49
31 Welder QualificationFillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test PlateOption 1 .......................................50
32 Welder QualificationFillet Weld Root-Bend Test PlateOption 2 ........................................................51
33 Welder QualificationPlate and Pipe Butt Joint Without Backing............................................................52
34 Welder QualificationPipe Butt Joint With Backing.................................................................................52
35 Welder QualificationTest Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Pipe or Square or
Rectangular Tubing......................................................................................................................................52
36 Welder QualificationOptional Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Square or
Rectangular Tubing......................................................................................................................................53
37 Welder QualificationLocation of Test Specimens for Welded Test Pipe and Square or
Rectangular Tubing......................................................................................................................................57

xiii
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure Page No.


38 Welding Operator QualificationTest Plate for Unlimited Thickness.......................................................58
39 Welding Operator QualificationElectroslag and Electrogas Welded Butt Joint......................................59
40 Tack Welder QualificationFillet Weld Break Specimen .........................................................................61
41 Tack Welder QualificationMethod of Rupturing Fillet Weld Break Specimen ......................................61
42 Cracks in Welded Joints...............................................................................................................................64
43 Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles ...............................................................................................65
44 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal
Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length ............................................................................68
45 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal
Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length ..............................................................................68
46 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length .......................................................................................................69
47 Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints
Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length..........................................................................................................69
48 Examples of Aligned Rounded Indications .................................................................................................72
49 Examples of Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications ................................................................................72
50 Charts for Thickness Equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm] to 1/4 in. [6 mm], Inclusive .................................................72

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
51 Charts for Thickness Over 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm], Inclusive ....................................................73
52 Charts for Thickness Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] to 3/4 in. [20 mm], Inclusive ..................................................73
53 Charts for Thickness Over 3/4 in. [20 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm], Inclusive .....................................................74
54 Charts for Thickness Over 2 in. [50 mm] to 4 in. [100 mm], Inclusive.......................................................75
55 Charts for Thickness Over 4 in. [100 mm] ..................................................................................................76
56 70 Calibration Standard..............................................................................................................................78
57 60 Calibration Standard..............................................................................................................................79
58 45 Calibration Standard..............................................................................................................................80
59 Typical Screen Calibration...........................................................................................................................81
60 Test ProcedureButt Joint Welds...............................................................................................................82
61 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Not Ground Flush ......................82
62 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Butt Joint Welds Ground Flush .............................83
63 Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities in Corner Welds Not Ground Flush...........................84
64 Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds ...........................................................................................................84
65 Alternate Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds ...........................................................................................84
66 Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material...........................................................................................................90
I.1 Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints.................................................................93
I.2 Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints ....................................................................104

xiv
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Specification for Welded Joints


in Machinery and Equipment

1. Scope 2. Normative References


This specification sets forth the classification of The following standards contain provisions which,
welded joints of carbon and low-alloy steels for use in through reference in this text, constitute provisions of
the design and manufacture of machinery and equipment this AWS standard. For undated references, the latest
subjected to static and dynamic loading. This specifi- edition of the referenced standard shall apply. For dated
cation is not intended to dictate load determination, references, subsequent amendments to, or revisions of,
design assumptions, safety factors, or calculation meth- any of these publications do not apply.
ods. These are the responsibility of the design engineer. 2.1 American Welding Society (AWS)1
The intent of this document is to establish the effect of (1) AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding,
weld joint geometry, welding practices, and quality con- Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination
trol on allowable stress levels. The specification also (2) AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and
provides practices that can be used for qualification and Definitions
examination of welded joints used in fabrication of (3) AWS A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel
machinery and equipment. It is not the intent of this Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
specification to restrict the use of other proven methods (4) AWS A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
and procedures which achieve acceptable results and Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
which have been agreed to in writing by the Owner and (5) AWS A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel
Manufacturer. Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
This specification makes use of both U.S. Customary (6) AWS A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel
Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
Units and the International System of Units (SI). The
(7) AWS A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel
measurements may not be exact equivalents; therefore
Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
each system must be used independently of the other
(8) AWS A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
without combining in any way. The specification with
Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding
the designation D14.4 uses U.S. Customary Units. The
(9) AWS A5.28, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
specification D14.4M uses SI Units. The latter are shown
Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding
in appropriate columns in tables and figures or within
(10) AWS A5.29, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel
brackets [ ] when used in the text. Detailed dimensions Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding
on figures are in inches. A separate tabular form that (11) AWS A5.32, Specification for Welding Shielding
relates the U.S. Customary Units with SI Units may be Gases
used in tables and figures. (12) AWS B2.1, Specification for Welding Procedure
Safety and health issues and concerns are beyond the and Performance Qualification
scope of this standard, and therefore are not fully (13) AWS B4.0-98, Standard Methods for Mechanical
addressed herein. Safety and health information is avail- Testing of Welds, (U. S. Customary units only)
able from other sources, including, but not limited to, (14) AWS B4.0M:2000, Standard Methods for
ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Pro- Mechanical Testing of Welds, (SI units only)
cesses, and applicable federal and state regulations.
Some sources of safety and health information can be 1. AWS standards are published by the American Welding
found in Annex C. Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

1
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(15) AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification 3. Definitions


and Certification of Welding Inspectors
(16) AWS QC7, Standard for Certified Welders. The terms that follow are defined for the purposes of
this specification. Other terms used in this specification
2.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers are defined in AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and
(ASME)2 Definitions.
(1) ASME Section VIIIDiv 1, ASME Boiler and effective weld areas
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1: Design
1. groove welds. The effective area is the effective
and Fabrication of Pressure Vessels
weld length multiplied by the weld size (see 5.17.1 for
(2) ASME Section VIIIDiv 2, ASME Boiler and additional details).
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 2: Alter-
native Rules. 2. fillet welds. The effective area is the effective
weld length multiplied by the effective throat (see
2.3 American Society of Testing and Materials 5.17.2 for additional details).
(ASTM)3
(1) ASTM A 6, Specification for General Require- 3. plug and slot welds. The effective area shall be
ments for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and the nominal area of the hole or slot in the plane of the
Bars for Structural Use faying surface.
(2) ASTM A 370, Test Methods and Definitions for Engineer. The responsible technical authority.
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
Manufacturer. The organization responsible for the per-
(3) ASTM A 435, Specification for Straight-Beam
formance of the work covered by this specification.
Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates for Pressure
Vessels maximum allowable stress. The ultimate tensile
(4) ASTM E 94, Guide for Radiographic Testing strength of the base metal, divided by the safety factor
(5) ASTM E 164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic selected by the designer. It is suggested that the safety
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Contact Examination of Weldments factor not be less than four (4).


(6) ASTM E 587, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic non-redundant load path structures. Structures where
Angle Beam Examination by the Contact Method there is only one load path and where a fracture will
(7) ASTM E 709, Practice for Magnetic Particle cause collapse.
Examination
Owner. The person, company, or agency that purchases
(8) ASTM E 747, Guide for Controlling Quality of the equipment.
Radiographic Testing Using Wire Penetrameters
(9) ASTM E 1025, Practice for Hole-Type Image principal structural weldments. Those weldments that
Quality Indicators Used for Radiography carry the main working loads during normal operations.
(10) ASTM E 1032, Method for Radiographic Exami- primary welds. Welds, the failure of which would result
nation of Weldments. in (1) a carried load being dropped in excess of 4 in.
[100 mm] or (2) an increase of stress beyond the
2.4 American Society for Nondestructive Testing
allowable stress limits, as defined in Table 2, Allow-
(ASNT)4
able Stresses, in other welds or base metal. Any welds
(1) ANSI/ASNT CP-189, ASNT Standard for Quali- subject to only compressive stresses are not consid-
fication and Certification of Nondestructive Testing ered primary.
Personnel
(2) SNT-TC-1A, Recommended Practice No. SNT- redundant load path structures. Structures with redun-
TC-1A. dant load paths have multi-load paths where a single
fracture in a member cannot lead to collapse.
2. ASME standards are published by the American Society of stress range. The algebraic difference between the
Mechanical Engineers, 3 Park Avenue, New York, NY 10017. maximum stress and minimum stress.
3. ASTM standards are published by the American Society for
Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Consho- secondary welds. Welds not covered by the require-
hocken, PA 19428-2959. ments of primary welds. Secondary welds shall be
4. ASNT standards are published by the American Society for noted as such on the drawings. They must carry com-
Nondestructive Testing, 1711 Arlingate Lane, Columbus, OH pressive stress only or be subjected to a stress of less
43228. than 5000 psi [34.5 MPa]. Secondary welds only need

2
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

to meet the requirements of Section 6, Workmanship, 4.3 Quality Control Requirements. Table 1 indicates
and Section 8, Weld Quality and Inspection. the inspection requirements for Joint Classes I through
VI. The service performance of a welded joint may be
tensile strength of the weld metal. The minimum tensile
adversely affected by the presence of discontinuities.
strength specified for the filler metal classification as
The weld tolerance for discontinuities depends upon the
published in the applicable filler metal specification.
size, shape, and orientation of the discontinuities within
the stress system and the severity of the stress imposed.
Nondestructive inspection procedures do not necessarily
4. Classification of Welded Joints reveal the influences of discontinuities within a stress
system. Weld tolerance for discontinuities may be regu-
4.1 Joint Classes. Welded joints are divided into the fol-
lated to the severity of the stress imposed and the sensi-
lowing six classifications based on the design of the joint
tivity of the inspection procedure. This approach is used
and anticipated performance (see Figure 1). Each class
in the development of quality control requirements for
is also rated for inspection requirements (see Table 1)
the classes of weldments as established in Table 1. Infor-
and maximum allowable stress levels (see Figure 2 and
mation furnished to the bidder shall identify the extent of
Table 2) which are described in later sections of this
inspection to be performed.
specification.
4.1.1 Class I is a complete joint penetration butt joint

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
weld, welded from both sides with the root of the first 5. Welded Joint Design
side chipped or gouged and ground back to sound metal
and reinforcements ground or machined flush with the 5.1 Stresses in Weld Metal. Except as modified by 5.2
direction of removal parallel to the principal stress.5 and 5.3, allowable stresses in weld metal shall not exceed
those listed in Table 2. As defined in Section 3, the
4.1.2 Class II is a complete joint penetration butt, T-, maximum allowable stress is the ultimate tensile strength
or corner joint welded from both sides, with the root of of the base metal, divided by the safety factor selected by
the first side chipped or gouged and ground back to the designer.
sound metal before depositing the second side.5, 6
5.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the maximum shear
4.1.3 Class III is a complete joint penetration butt, T-,
stress in the net section shall be 65% of the maximum
or corner joint welded from both sides, or from one
allowable stress in tension.
side using backing strips which are not removed after
welding.6 5.1.2 Stress on the effective throat area of fillet welds
(see 5.17.2) is considered as shear stress regardless of the
4.1.4 Class IV is a complete joint penetration butt, T-,
direction of application.
or corner joint welded from one side without the use of
backing; a partial penetration butt, T-, or corner joint 5.1.3 The effective area of plug and slot welds (see
welded on both sides; or a fillet lap, T-, or corner joint 5.17.3) is considered to resist shear stresses only.
welded on both sides.6
5.2 Fatigue Stress Provisions. The fatigue stress pro-
4.1.5 Class V is a partial joint penetration butt, T-, or visions of this specification,7 as described in 5.2.1, have
corner joint welded on one side; a fillet, plug or slot been derived from the Standard Specifications for High-
welded lap, T-, or corner joint welded on one side. way Bridges as adopted by the American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
4.1.6 Class VI is a butt, T-, corner, lap, fillet, edge, or
or from AISC 335, Specification for Structural Steel
plug weld made with no special joint preparation; a
Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design
welded joint of secondary importance not subject to
by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
dynamic loading; a weld of secondary importance in
The cycle life should be determined by the Engineer to
strength.
meet the planned life requirements of the structure.
4.2 Intermittent Welded Joints. Intermittent partial Fatigue stress provisions may be modified by more strin-
joint penetration welds in butt, T-, and corner joints and gent requirements of specific codes. Stress categories for
intermittent welded lap joints and plug welds are placed determining allowable stress ranges are described in
in Joint Class V or VI. Table 3 for the illustrated examples shown in Figure 2.

5. Backgouging is not necessary where process and procedure 7. P. B. Keating and J. W. Fisher, Evaluation of Fatigue Test
have demonstrated that satisfactory root tie-in is obtained. and Design Criteria on Welded Details, National Cooperation
6. Double-welded T-joints may be reinforced with fillet welds. Highway Research Program, Report #286.

3
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 1Classification of Welded Joints

4
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Note: Avoid loading the joint in the arrow direction.

Figure 1 (Continued)Classification of Welded Joints

5
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 1
Weld Inspection Requirements(1),(2)
Visual Inspection (see 8.1)
Radiographic (see 8.2) Magnetic-Particle (see 8.4)
Class or Ultrasonic (see 8.3) or Liquid Penetrant (see 8.5) Discontinuities Dimensions
(see 4.1) Examination Examination (see Table 17) (see 8.1.7)

I yes yes yes yes


II yes (10%) yes yes yes
III yes yes yes
IV yes yes
V yes yes
VI yes yes
Notes:
(1) 100% inspection is required unless otherwise indicated.
(2) Material subject to delayed cracking such as ASTM A 514 and A 517 shall have inspections performed not less than 48 hours after the completed
weld has cooled down to ambient temperatures

5.2.1 Allowable Fatigue Stress. Weldments subject [0C] subject to tensile stress shall require a supplemen-
to repeated variations or reversals of stress shall be tal impact properties specification.8
designed so the maximum stress does not exceed that
5.4 Filler Metals. For joining materials, the filler metals
allowed in 5.1, and the stress range does not exceed the
found in Table 6 shall be used for Joint Class I, II, and III
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

allowable fatigue stress range for redundant structures


welds.
given in Table 4 and shown graphically in Figure 3 for
the applicable stress category and nominal number of 5.5 Lap Joints
loading cycles. The allowable fatigue stress ranges listed
5.5.1 The minimum overlap of parts in stress-carrying lap
in Table 5 and Figure 4 (derived by applying a varying
joints shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part.
factor of safety to the stress ranges values of Table 4) are
Unless lateral deflection of the parts is prevented, they shall
suggested for non-redundant structures.
be connected by at least two transverse lines of fillet, plug, or
5.2.2 Redundant and Non-Redundant Load Path slot welds or by two or more longitudinal fillet or slot welds.
Structures. Redundant structures are those with multi-
load paths where a single fracture in a member cannot 5.5.2 If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in lap
joints of end connections, the length of each fillet weld
lead to collapse. A nonredundant load path member is
shall be no less than the perpendicular distance between
one where a fracture will cause collapse.
them. The transverse spacing of the welds shall not
5.2.3 Stress Range. Stress range is defined as the exceed 16 times the thickness of the connected thinner
algebraic difference between the maximum stress and part, unless suitable provision is made (as by intermedi-
minimum stress. ate plug or slot welds) to prevent buckling or separation
5.2.4 Load Cycles. The number of cycles of maxi- of the parts. The longitudinal fillet welds may be either at
mum stress range to be considered in the design shall be the edges of the member or in slots.
selected from Table 4 or 5 unless otherwise specified. 5.5.3 When fillet welds in holes or slots are used,
5.3 Combined Unit Stresses and Toughness the clear distance from the edge of the hole or slot to
Requirements the adjacent edge of the part containing it, measured per-
pendicular to the direction of stress, shall be no less than
5.3.1 In the case of axial stress combined with bend- five times the thickness of the part, nor less than two times
ing, the allowable unit stress of each kind shall be the width of the hole or slot. The strength of the part shall be
governed by the requirements of 5.1 and 5.2, and the determined from the critical net section of the base metal.
maximum combined unit stresses calculated shall be
limited in accordance with the requirements of the appli-
8. A suggested source of information: Barson, J. M. The Devel-
cable contract.
opment of AASHTO Fracture-Toughness Requirements for
5.3.2 Charpy V-Notch Impact Requirements. Main Bridge Steels, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington
load-carrying weldments which operate below 32F D.C., February 1975.

6
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

General Note: a = width, b = thickness, c = length, and R = radius of components for items shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2Illustrative Examples for Table 3

7
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

General Note: a = width, b = thickness, c = length, and R = radius of components for items shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2 (Continued)Illustrative Examples for Table 3

8
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 2
Maximum Allowable Stress in Weld Metal (See 5.1)
Type of Weld Stress in Weld (1) Allowable Stress Required Weld Strength Level (2)

Complete Joint Tension normal to the effective Same as base metal. Matching weld metal shall be
Penetration Groove area. used.
Welds (Class I, II,
III, or IV) Compression normal to the Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

effective area. equal to or one classification


(10 ksi [70 MPa]) less than
matching weld metal may be
used.
Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level
parallel to the axis of the weld. equal to or less than matching
weld metal may be used.
Shear on the effective area. 0.27 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
weld metal (ksi or [MPa]), except equal to or less than matching
shear stress on base metal shall not weld metal may be used.
exceed 0.36 yield strength of base
metal.
Partial Joint Penetra- Compres- Joint not 0.45 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
tion Groove Welds sion normal designed to weld metal (ksi or [MPa]), except equal to or less than matching
(Class IV or V) to effective bear. shear stress on base metal shall not weld metal may be used.
area. exceed 0.55 yield strength of base
metal.
Joint designed Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level
to bear. equal to or less than matching
weld metal may be used.
Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level
parallel to the axis of the equal to or less than matching
weld.(3) weld metal may be used.
Shear parallel to axis of metal. 0.27 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
weld metal (ksi or [MPa]), except equal to or less than matching
shear stress on base metal shall not weld metal may be used.
exceed 0.36 yield strength of base
metal.
Tension normal to effective 0.27 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
area. weld metal (ksi or [MPa]), except equal to or less than matching
tensile stress on base metal shall not weld metal may be used.
exceed 0.55 yield strength of base
metal.
Fillet Welds Shear on effective area. 0.27 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
(Class IV, V, or VI) weld metal (ksi or [MPa]). equal to or less than matching
weld metal may be used.
Tension or compression Same as base metal. Weld metal with a strength level
parallel to axis of weld.(3) equal to or less than matching
weld metal may be used.
Plug and Slot Welds Shear parallel to faying 0.27 nominal tensile strength of Weld metal with a strength level
(Class V or VI) surfaces (on effective area). weld metal (ksi or [MPa]), except equal to or less than matching
shear stress on base metal shall not weld metal may be used.
exceed 0.36 yield strength of base
metal.
Notes:
(1) For an explanation of effective area, see 5.17.
(2) For matching weld metal, see Table 6.
(3) Fillet weld and partial joint penetration groove welds joining the component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web connections,
may be designed without regard to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds.

9
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 3
Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range in Tables 4 and 5
Stress Category Illustrative
General Kind of (See Tables Examples(7)
Condition Situation(1), (2), (3), (4) Stress(5) 4 and 5)(6) (See Figure 2)

Plain Member Base metal with rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges T or Rev. A 1, 2
with ANSI smoothness of 1000 micro-inches [25 microns] or
less.

Base metal in members without attachments, built-up plates or T or Rev. B 3, 4, 5, 6


shapes connected by continuous full penetration groove welds
or by continuous fillet welds parallel to the direction of applied
stress.

Base metal in members without attachments, built-up plates, or T or Rev. 'B' 3, 4, 5, 6


shapes connected by full penetration groove welds with
backing bars not removed, or by partial penetration groove
welds parallel to the direction of applied stress.

Built-up Base metal at toe welds on girder webs or flanges adjacent to T or Rev. C 7
Members welded transverse stiffeners.

Base metal at ends of partial length welded cover plates


narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends, with or
without welds across the ends or wider than flange with welds
across the ends.
Flange thickness 0.8 in. [20 mm] T or Rev. 'E' 5
Flange thickness > 0.8 in. [20 mm] T or Rev. 'E' 5

Base metal at end of partial length welded cover plates wider T or Rev. 'E' 5
than the flange without welds across the ends.

Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove welded T or Rev. B 8, 9
splices of parts of similar cross section ground flush, with
grinding in the direction of applied stress and with weld
soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection
in accordance with the requirements of Section 6.

Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove welded


splices at transitions in width or thickness, with welds ground
to provide slopes no steeper than 1 in 2.5 with grinding in the
direction of applied stress and with weld soundness established
Groove Welds
by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8.
A514 base metal. T or Rev. 'B' 10, 11
Other base metals. T or Rev. B 10, 11

Base metal and weld metal at full penetration groove welded T or Rev. C 8, 9, 10, 11
splices, with or without transitions having slopes no greater
than 1 in 2.5 when reinforcement is not removed; weld
soundness is established by radiographic or ultrasonic
inspection in accordance with the requirements of Section 8.

Partial-Penetration Weld metal at partial-penetration transverse groove welds, T or Rev. F 14


Groove Welds based on effective throat area of the weld or welds.

Base metal at intermittent fillet welds. T or Rev. E

Base metal at junction at axially loaded members with fillet


Fillet Welded welded end connections. Welds shall be disposed about the axis
Connections of the members so as to balance weld stresses.
b 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E 15, 16
b > 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. 'E' 15, 16
(Continued)

10
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 3 (Continued)
Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range in Tables 4 and 5
Stress Category Illustrative
General Kind of (See Tables Examples(7)
Condition Situation(1), (2), (3), (4) Stress(5) 4 and 5)(6) (See Figure 2)

Fillet Welded Base metal members connected with transverse fillet welds.
Connections b 1/2 in. [13 mm] T or Rev. (6)C (6) 18, 19
(Continued) b > 1/2 in. [13 mm]

Weld metal of continuous or intermittent longitudinal or 5, 15, 16,


Fillet Welds
transverse fillet welds. S F 18, 19

Plug or Base metal at plug or slot welds. T or Rev. E 25


Slot Welds Shear on plug or slot welds. S F 25

Base metal at details attached by full-penetration groove welds


subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading when the
detail embodies a transition radius R with the weld termination
ground smooth and for transverse loading, the weld soundness
established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in
accordance with Section 8.
Longitudinal loading
R > 24 in. [600 mm] T or Rev. B 12
24 in. [600 mm] R > 6 in. [150 mm] T or Rev. C 12
6 in. [150 mm] R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] R T or Rev. E 12

Detail base metal for transverse loading; equal thickness and


reinforcement removed.
R > 24 in. [600 mm] T or Rev. B 12
24 in. [600 mm] R > 6 in. [150 mm] T or Rev. C 12
6 in. [150 mm] R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] R T or Rev. E 12, 13

Detail base metal for transverse loading; equal thickness and


reinforcement not removed.
R > 24 in. [600 mm] T or Rev. C 12
Attachments 24 in. [600 mm] R > 6 in. [150 mm] T or Rev. C 12
6 in. [150 mm] R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] R T or Rev. E 12, 13

Detail base metal for transverse loading; unequal thickness and


reinforcement removed.
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 12
2 in. [50 mm] R T or Rev. E 12, 13

Detail base metal for transverse loading; equal thickness and


reinforcement removed.
All R T or Rev. E 12, 13

Detail base metal for transverse loading.


R > 6 in. [150 mm] T or Rev. C
6 in. [150 mm] R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D
2 in. [50 mm] R T or Rev. E 17

Base metal at detail attached by full-penetration groove welds


subject to longitudinal loading.
2 in. [50 mm] < a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] T or Rev. D 13
a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] when b 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E 13
a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] when b > 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. 'E' 13

(Continued)

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

11
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 3 (Continued)
Stress Categories to Determine the Allowable Stress Range in Tables 4 and 5
Stress Category Illustrative
General Kind of (See Tables Examples(7)
Condition Situation(1), (2), (3), (4) Stress(5) 4 and 5)(6) (See Figure 2)

Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or partial


penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading.
a < 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. C 13, 21, 22, 23, 24
2 in. [50 mm] < a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] T or Rev. D 13, 21, 22, 24
a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] when b 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. E 13, 21, 22, 24
a < 12b or 4 in. [100 mm] when b > 1 in. [25 mm] T or Rev. 'E' 13, 21, 22, 24

Base metal attached by fillet welds or partial-penetration


groove welds subjected to longitudinal loading when the weld
termination embodies a transition radius with the weld
termination ground smooth.
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 17
Attachments R 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. E 17
(Continued)
Fillet-welded attachments where the weld termination
embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground smooth,
and main material subject to longitudinal loading.
Detail base metal for transverse loading. 12, 13
R > 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. D 17

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R 2 in. [50 mm] T or Rev. E 17

Base metal at stud-type shear connector attached by fillet weld T or Rev. C 20


or automatic end weld.

Shear stress on nominal area of stud-type shear connectors. S F 12

Notes:
(1) Longitudinally Loaded signifies direction of applied stress is parallel to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
Transversely Loaded signifies direction of applied stress is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the weld.
(2) Transversely loaded partial penetration groove welds are prohibited.
(3) R = radius for items shown in Figure 2 that have a radius.
(4) a is the width, b is the thickness, and c is the length of components for items shown in Figure 2.
(5) T signifies range in tensile stress only; Rev. signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; S signifies range in shear,
including shear stress reversal.
(6) Allowable fatigue stress range on throat of fillet welds transversely loaded is a function of the effective throat and plate thickness. (See Frank and
Fisher, Journal of the Structural Division, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), Vol. 105, No. ST9, Sept. 1979.)
(7) These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations.

5.6 Corner and T-Joints. Corner and T-joints that are to (2) Groove welds made from one side only:
be subjected to bending about an axis parallel to the joint (a) Without any backing;
shall have their welds arranged to avoid concentration of (b) With backing, other than steel, that has not
tensile stress at the root of any weld. been qualified in accordance with 7.2;
5.7 Prohibited Types of Joints and Welds in Dynamic (c) Stress between components for built-up
Applications. The joints and welds listed in (1) through (6) members designed primarily for axial stress;
below are not permitted unless an analysis is made to ensure (3) Intermittent groove welds;
the base metal and weld joint stresses meet the ranges and (4) Intermittent fillet welds;
allowable maximums permitted by this specification. (5) Bevel-grooves and J-grooves in butt joints for
(1) Butt joints not fully welded throughout their cross positions other than the flat position;
section; (6) Plug and slot welds on primary tension members.

12
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 4
Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Redundant Load Path Structures(1)
Allowable Range of Stress,(2) ksi [MPa]

Stress Category For 20 000 to For up to For up to For Over


(See Table 3) 100 000 Cycles(3) 500 000 Cycles 2 000 000 Cycles 2 000 000 Cycles

A 63 [435] 37 [255] 24 [165] 24 [165]


B 49 [340] 29 [200] 18 [125] 16 [110]
B 39 [270] 23 [160] 15 [105] 12 [85]0
C 35 [240] 21 [145] 13 [90]0 10 [70]0
(4)12 [85](4)0

D 28 [195] 16 [110] 10 [70]0 7 [50]


E 22 [150] 13 [90]0 8 [55] 5 [35]
E 16 [110] 9 [60] 6 [40] 3 [20]
F 5 [105] 12 [85]0 9 [60] 8 [55]

Notes:
(1) Structure types with multi-load paths where a single fracture in a member cannot lead to the collapse.
(2) The range of stress is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and the minimum stress. Tension stress is considered to have
the opposite algebraic sign from compression stress.
(3) Structures under 20 000 cycles are to be considered statically loaded.
(4) At toe of transverse stiffener welds on girder webs or flanges.

Figure 3Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Redundant Structures

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
13
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 5
Allowable Fatigue Stress Range for Non-Redundant Load Path Structures(1)
Allowable Range of Stress,(2), (3) ksi [MPa}

Stress Category For 20 000 to For Up to For Up to For Over


(See Table 3) 100 000 Cycles(4) 500 000 Cycles 2 000 000 Cycles 2 000 000 Cycles

A 50 [345] 29 [200] 24 [165] 24 [165]


B 39 [270] 23 [160] 16 [110] 16 [110]
'B' 31 [215] 18 [125] 11 [75]0 11 [75]0
C 28 [195] 16 [110] 10 [70]0 9 [60]
(5)12 [85](5)0 (5)11 [75](5)0

D 22 [150] 13 [90]0 8 [55] 5 [35]


(6)E(6) 17 [115] 10 [70]0 6 [40] 2.5 [17]0.
'E' 12 [85]0 7 [50]0 4 [30] 1.5 [10]0.
F 12 [85]0 9 [60]0 7 [50] 6 [40]
Notes:
(1) Structure types where a single fracture in a member will cause collapse.
(2) The range of stress is defined as the algebraic difference between the maximum stress and the minimum stress. Tension stress is considered to have
the opposite algebraic sign from compression stress.
(3) Stress range numbers in this table are reduced from those in Table 4, as a suggested safety factor for nonredundant load path structures. (See 5.1
and 5.2.)
(4) Structures under 20 000 cycles are to be considered statically loaded.
(5) At toe of transverse stiffener welds on girder webs or flanges.
(6) Partial length welded cover plates shall not be used on flanges more than 0.8 in. [20 mm] thick for nonredundant load path structures.

Figure 4Design Stress Range Curves for Categories A to F Non-Redundant Structures

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
14
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

at corners of parts or members, but shall be returned con-


Table 6
tinuously, full size, around the corner for a length equal
Base Metal and Filler Metal Relationship to twice the weld size where such return can be made in
Base Metal Tensile Filler Metal Tensile
the same plane. Boxing shall be indicated on design and
Level(1) ksi [MPa] Series (2), (3), (4) detail drawings.

45 to 75 [310 to 515] E60XX, E70XX, E70XX-X 5.10.2 Fillet welds deposited on the opposite sides
E80XX-X, E90XX-X of a common plane of contact between two parts shall
E100XX-X, E110XX-X be interrupted at a corner common to both welds (see
Figure 5).
>75 to 85 [>515 to 585] E80XX-X, E90XX-X
E100XX-X, E110XX-X
5.11 Eccentricity of Connections
>85 to 95 [>585 to 655] E90XX-X, E9018M,
E100XX-X, E10018M, 5.11.1 Eccentricity between intersecting parts and
E110XX-X, E11018M
members shall be avoided insofar as practicable.
>95 to 105 [>655 to 725] E100XX-X, E10018M,
E110XX-X, E11018M 5.11.2 In designing welded joints, adequate provision
shall be made for bending stresses due to eccentricity, if
>105 to 115 [>725 to 795] E110XX-X, E11018M any, in the disposition and section of base metal parts
Notes:
and in the location and types of welded joints.
(1) For joining base metals of different strength levels, the lower
strength level shall determine the filler metal tensile series. 5.11.3 For members having symmetrical cross sec-
(2) Filler metals for use with welding processes other than SMAW tions, the connection welds shall be arranged symmetri-
shall be of the same filler metal tensile series as indicated above for
each base metal strength level. cally about the axis of the member, or proper allowance
(3) Filler metals of alloy groups B3, B3L, B3H, B4, B4L, B5, B6, B6L, shall be made for unsymmetrical distribution of stresses.
B6H, B7, B7L, B8, B8L, or B9 in AWS A5.5, A5.23, A5.28, or
A5.29 or those classified in appropriate specifications, are not
prequalified for use in the as-welded condition. 5.11.4 For axially stressed angle members, the center
(4) See Section 2 for filler metal specifications. of gravity of the connecting welds shall lie between the
line of the center of gravity of the angles cross section
and the centerline of the connected leg. If the center of
gravity of the connecting weld lies outside of this zone,
the total stresses, including those due to the eccentricity
5.8 Combinations of Welds. If two or more of the gen-
eral types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, or slot) are com-
bined in a single joint, their allowable capacity shall be
computed with reference to the axis of the group in order
to determine the allowable capacity of the combination.
However, such methods of adding individual capacities
of welds do not apply to fillet welds reinforcing groove
welds (see 5.17.4).

5.9 Welds In Combination with Rivets and Bolts. Riv-


ets and bolts in combination with welds shall not be con-
sidered as sharing the stress, and the welds shall be
provided to carry the entire stress for which the connec-
tion is designed. Bolts or rivets used in assembly may be
left in place if their removal is not specified. If bolts are
to be removed, the plans should indicate whether or not
holes should be filled, and in what manner.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

5.10 Fillet Weld Details

5.10.1 Fillet welds which support a tensile force that Figure 5Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides
is not parallel to the axis of the weld shall not terminate of a Common Plate of Contact

15
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

from the center of gravity of the angle, shall not exceed 2.5 with the edge of either part or shall be transitioned
those permitted by this specification. with a 2.0 ft [0.6 m] minimum radius tangent to the nar-
rower part of the center of the butt joints (see Figure 7).
5.12 Connections or Splices in Tension and Compres-
A radius transition is required for steel having yield
sion Members. Connections or splices of tension or
strength equal to or greater than 90 ksi [620 MPa].
compression members which are made by groove welds
shall have complete joint penetration. Connections or 5.16 Girders and Beams
splices made with fillet or plug welds, except as noted in
5.16.1 Connections or splices in beams or girders when
5.13, shall be designed for an average of the calculated
made by groove welds shall have complete joint penetra-
stress and the strength of the member, but not less than
tion welds. Connections or splices made with fillet or plug
75% of the strength of the member; or if there is repeated
welds shall be designed for the average of the calculated
application of load, the maximum stress or stress range
stress and the strength of the member, but no less than
in such connection or splice shall not exceed the fatigue
75% of the strength member. Where there is repeated
stress permitted by this specification.
loading, the maximum stress or stress range shall not
5.13 Connections or Splices in Compression Members exceed the fatigue stress permitted by this specification.
with Milled Joints. If members subject to compression
only are spliced, and full-milled bearing is provided, the 5.16.2 Splices between sections of rolled beams or
splice material and its welding shall be arranged, unless built-up girders shall preferably be made in a single
otherwise stipulated by the applicable general specifica- transverse plane. Shop splices of webs and flanges in
tions, to hold all parts in alignment and shall be propor- built-up girders made before the webs and flanges are
tioned to carry 50% of the computed stress in the joined to each other may be located in a single transverse
member. Where such members are in full-milled bearing plane or multiple transverse planes, but the fatigue stress
on base plates, there shall be sufficient welding to hold provisions of this specification shall apply.
all parts securely in place. 5.16.3 Stiffeners
5.14 Connections of Components of Built-Up Mem- 5.16.3.1 Intermittent fillet welds used to connect
bers. When a member is built up of two or more pieces, stiffeners to beams and girders shall comply with the
the pieces shall be connected along their longitudinal following requirements:
joints by sufficient weld to make the pieces act in unison.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(1) Minimum length of each weld shall be 1-1/2 in.


5.15 Transition of Thicknesses or Widths at Butt Joints [40 mm].
(2) Welds shall be made on both sides of the joint for
5.15.1 Butt joints between parts having unequal thick- at least 25% of its length.
nesses and subject to tensile stress shall have a smooth (3) Maximum end-to-end clear spacing of welds shall
transition between the offset surfaces at a slope of no be 12 times the thickness of the thinner part, but not
more than 1 in 2.5 with the surface of either part. The more than 6 in. [150 mm].
transition may be accomplished by sloping weld sur- (4) Each end of stiffeners, connected to a web, shall
faces, by chamfering the thicker part, or by a combina- be welded on both sides of the joint.
tion of the two methods (see Figure 6).
5.16.3.2 Stiffeners, if used, should be arranged in
5.15.2 In butt joints between parts of unequal thick- pairs on opposite sides of the web. Stiffeners may be
ness that are subject only to shear or compressive stress, welded to tension or compression flanges. The fatigue
transition of thickness shall be accomplished as specified stress or stress ranges at the points of attachment to the
in Figure 6 when the offset between surfaces at either tension flange or tension portions of the web shall com-
side of the joint is greater than the thickness of the thin- ply with the fatigue requirements of this specification.
ner part connected. When the offset is equal to or less Transverse fillet welds may be used for welding stiffen-
than the thickness of the thinner part connected, the face ers to flanges.
of the weld shall be sloped no more than 1 in 2.5 from
the surface of the thinner part or shall be sloped to the 5.16.3.3 If stiffeners are used on only one side of
surface of the thicker part if this requires a lesser slope the web, they shall be welded to the compression flange.
with the following exception: truss member joints and
5.16.3.4 Unless otherwise specified, fillet welds
beam and girder flange joints shall be made with smooth
connecting attachments shall start or terminate not less
transitions of the type specified in 5.15.1.
than the weld size from the end of the joint. For stiffeners
5.15.3 Butt joints between parts having unequal width on girders, the weld joining the stiffeners to the web shall
and subject to tensile stress shall have a smooth transi- start or terminate not less than four times the thickness of
tion between offset edges at a slope of no more than 1 in the web from the face of the flange.

16
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

General Notes:
(a) Groove may be of any permitted or qualified type and detail.
(b) Transition slopes shown are the maximum permitted.

Figure 6Transition of Thickness at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Thickness

17
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Note: Mandatory for steels with a yield strength greater than or equal to 90 ksi [620 MPa]. Optional for other steels.

Figure 7Transition of Width at Butt Joints of Parts Having Unequal Width

5.16.4 Girders (built-up I-sections) should be made 5.17 Effective Weld Areas, Lengths, and Throats
with one plate in each flange, i.e., without cover plates.
5.17.1 Groove Welds. The effective area shall be the
The unsupported projection of a flange shall be no more
effective weld length multiplied by the weld size.
than permitted by the applicable specification. The thick-
ness and width of a flange may be varied by butt joint 5.17.1.1 The effective weld length for any groove
welding parts of different thickness or width with transi- weld, square or skewed, shall be the width of the part
tions conforming to the requirements of 5.15. joined, perpendicular to the direction of stress.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

5.17.1.2 The weld size of a complete joint penetra-


5.16.5 Cover Plates. Cover plates should be limited tion groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part
to one on any flange. The maximum thickness of cover joined. No increase is permitted for weld reinforcement.
plates on a flange (total thickness of all cover plates if
more than one is used) shall be not greater than one and 5.17.1.3 The weld size of a partial joint penetration
groove weld shall be the depth of bevel less 1/8 in.
one-half times the thickness of the flange to which the
[3 mm] for grooves having a groove angle less than 60
cover plate is attached. The thickness and width of a
but no less than 45 at the root of the groove, when made
cover plate may be varied by welding of butt joint parts by shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) or submerged
of different thickness or width on transitions conforming arc welding (SAW), or when made in the vertical or
to the requirements of 5.15. Such plates shall be assem- overhead welding positions by gas metal arc welding
bled and welds ground smooth before being attached to (GMAW) or flux cored arc welding (FCAW).
the flange. The width of a cover plate, with recognition The weld size of a partial joint penetration groove
of dimensional tolerance allowed by ASTM A 6, Specifi- weld shall be the depth of bevel, without reduction, for
cation for General requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, grooves:
Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use, shall (1) Having a groove angle of 60 or greater at the
allow suitable space for a fillet weld along each edge of root of the groove when made by any of the following
the joint between the flange and the cover plate. welding processes: SMAW, SAW, GMAW, FCAW; or

18
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(2) Having a groove angle not less than 45 at the Manufacturer in construction or as required by the
root of the groove when made in flat or horizontal posi- Engineer.
tions by GMAW or FCAW.
5.17.2 Fillet Welds. The effective area shall be the
5.17.1.4 The effective weld size for flare groove effective weld length multiplied by the effective throat.
welds, when filled flush to the surface of a bar, or 90 Stress in a fillet weld shall be considered as applied to
bend in a formed section, or a rectangular tube, shall be this effective area, for any direction of applied load.
as shown in Table 7. 5.17.2.1 The effective length of a fillet weld shall
(1) When required by the Engineer, test sections shall be the overall length of the full-size fillet, including box-
be used to verify that the effective weld size is consis- ing. No reduction in effective length shall be made for
tently obtained. either the start or crater of the weld if the weld is full size
(2) For a given set of procedural conditions, if the throughout its length.
Manufacturer has demonstrated consistent production of 5.17.2.2 The effective length of a curved fillet
larger effective weld sizes than those shown in Table 7, weld shall be measured along the center line of the effec-
the Manufacturer may establish such larger effective tive throat. If the weld area of a fillet weld in a hole or
weld sizes by qualifications. slot computed from this length is greater than the area
(3) Qualifications required by 5.17.1.4(2) shall con- found from 5.17.3, then this latter area shall be used as
sist of sectioning the radiused member, normal to its the effective area of the fillet weld.
axis, at mid-length and at the ends of the weld. Such
5.17.2.3 The minimum effective length of a fillet
sectioning shall be made on a number of combinations of
weld shall be at least four times the nominal size, or the
material sizes representative of the range used by the
size of the weld shall not exceed one fourth its effective
length.
5.17.2.4 The effective throat shall be the minimum
distance, minus any convexity between the weld root and
Table 7 the face of a fillet weld.
Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds 5.17.3 Plug and Slot Welds. The effective area shall
be the nominal area of the hole or slot in the plane of the
Flare-Bevel-Groove Welds Flare-V-Groove Welds faying surface.
0.312R(1) 0.5R(1), (2) 5.17.4 Combination Weld. The effective throat of a
Notes: combination partial joint penetration groove weld and a
(1) R = radius of outside surface. fillet weld shall be the minimum distance from the joint
(2) Use 0.375R for GMAW (except short circuiting transfer) process root to the weld face of the fillet weld minus 1/8 in.
when R is 0.5 in. [13 mm] or greater.
[3 mm] (see Figure 8).

Note: The effective throat of a weld (E in this figure) is the minimum distance from the root of the joint to its face, with or without a deduc-
tion of 1/8 in. [3 mm].

Figure 8Combination of Bevel Groove and Fillet Weld Profiles

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

19
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

5.18 Fillers (see Figures 9 and 10) where design criteria indicate cyclic loading could pro-
duce fatigue failure (see Table 3).
5.18.1 Fillers may be used in the following:
(1) Splicing parts of different thicknesses; 5.20 Joint Qualification
(2) Connections that, due to existing geometric align-
ment, must accommodate offsets to permit simple 5.20.1 Joints meeting the requirements of the applica-
framing. ble provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 of this specification
are designated as prequalified. Prequalification and qual-
5.18.2 A filler less than 1/4 in. [6 mm] thick shall not
ification of welding procedures is covered in Section 7.
be used to transfer stress but shall be kept flush with the
welded edges of the stress-carrying part. The sizes of
5.20.1.1 Joints meeting these requirements may be
welds along such edges shall be increased over the
used without performing the joint welding procedure
required sizes by an amount equal to the thickness of the
filler (see Figure 9). qualification tests prescribed in 7.2.

5.18.3 Any filler 1/4 in. [6 mm] or more in thickness 5.20.1.2 The joint welding procedure for all joints
shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate or con- welded by short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding
necting material. It shall be welded to the part on which shall be qualified by tests prescribed in 7.2.
it is flat fitted, and the joint shall be of sufficient strength
to transmit the splice plate or connection material stress 5.20.2 Joint details shall comply with the standard
applied to the surface of the filler as an eccentric load. symbols in AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding
The welds joining the splice plate or connection material Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. Joint details
to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate may depart from the details prescribed in 5.23 and 5.24
or connection material stress and shall be long enough to only if the Manufacturer submits the proposed joint
avoid overstressing the filler along the toe of the weld
welding procedures to the Engineer for approval and at
(see Figure 10).
the Manufacturers expense demonstrates their adequacy
5.19 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Weld Restric- in conformance to the requirements of 7.2 of this specifi-
tions. Partial joint penetration groove welds subject to cation and their conformance with applicable provisions
tension normal to their longitudinal axis shall not be used of Section 5.

General Note: The effective area of Weld 2 shall equal that of Weld 1, but its size shall be its
effective size plus the thickness of the filler T.

Figure 9Splices or Connections with Fillers Less Than 1/4 in. [6 mm] Thick

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
20
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes:
(a) The effective area of Weld 2 shall equal that of Weld 1. The length of Weld 2 shall be suffi-
cient to avoid overstressing the filler in shear along the planes x-x.
(b) The effective area of Weld 3 shall equal that of Weld 1, and there shall be no overstress of
the ends of Weld 3 resulting from the eccentricity of the forces acting on the filler.

Figure 10Splices or Connections with Fillers 1/4 in. [6 mm] or Thicker

5.21 Details of Fillet Welds edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld may be
less than 1/16 in. [2 mm], provided the weld size is
5.21.1 The details of fillet welds made by SMAW,
clearly verifiable.
SAW, GMAW (except short circuiting transfer), or
FCAW to be used without joint welding procedure quali- 5.21.1.4 Fillet welds in holes or slots in lap joints
fications are listed in 5.21.1.1 through 5.21.1.6 and may be used to transfer shear or to prevent buckling or
detailed in Figure 11. separation of lapped parts. These fillet welds may over-
lap, subject to the provisions in 5.17.2.2. Fillet welds in
5.21.1.1 The minimum fillet weld size, except for
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

holes or slots are not to be considered as plug or slot


fillet welds used to reinforce groove welds, shall be as
welds.
shown in Table 8. In both cases, the minimum size
applies if it is sufficient to satisfy design requirements. 5.21.1.5 Fillet welds may be used in skewed T-
joints having a dihedral angle of not less than 60 nor
5.21.1.2 The minimum fillet weld size to develop
greater than 135 (see Figures 11C and 11D).
to the full strength of the thinner member joined is given
in Table 9. These values are only applicable when the 5.21.1.6 The minimum length of an intermittent
filler metal is properly matched with the base metal, the fillet weld shall be 1 1/2 in. [40 mm], and spacing shall
welds are loaded statically, and the thinner plate or leg is not exceed 12 times the thickness of thinner part, but not
fillet welded continuously on both sides (double fillet more than 6 in. [150 mm].
weld).
5.21.1.7 Minimum spacing and dimensions of
5.21.1.3 The maximum fillet weld size detailed holes or slot when fillet welding is used shall conform to
along edges of material shall be the following: the requirements of 5.22.
(1) The thickness of the base metal, for metal less
5.22 Details of Plug and Slot Welds
than 1/4 in. [6 mm] thick as detailed in Figure 11A; or
(2) 1/16 in. [2 mm] less than the thickness of base 5.22.1 The details of plug and slot welds made by the
metal, for metal 1/4 in. [6 mm] or more in thickness, as SMAW, GMAW, (except short circuiting transfer), or
detailed in Figure 11B, unless the weld is designated on FCAW process are listed in 5.22.2 through 5.22.8 and
the drawing to be built out to obtain full throat thickness. may be used without performing the joint welding proce-
In the as-welded condition, the distance between the dure qualification prescribed in 7.2.

21
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 11Details for Prequalified Fillet Welds

5.22.2 The minimum diameter of the hole for a plug 5.22.6 The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or
weld shall be no less than the thickness of the part con- shall have the corners rounded to a radius not less than
taining it plus 5/16 in. [8 mm], preferably rounded to the the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends
next greater odd 1/16 in. [even 2 mm] increment. The which extend to the edge of the part.
maximum diameter shall equal the minimum diameter
5.22.7 The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in
plus 1/8 in. [3 mm], or 2.25 times the thickness of the
a direction transverse to their length shall be four times
member, whichever is greater.
the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center
5.22.3 The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug spacing in a longitudinal direction of any line shall be
two times the length of the slot. --`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole.

5.22.4 The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not 5.22.8 The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in
exceed ten times the thickness of the part containing it. metal 5/8 in. [16 mm] thick, or less, shall be equal to the
The width of the slot shall be no less than the thickness thickness of the material. In metal over 5/8 in. [16 mm]
of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. [8 mm], preferably thick, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the
rounded to the next greater odd 1/16 in. [even 2 mm] material, but no less than 5/8 in. [16 mm].
increment. The maximum width shall equal the mini- 5.23 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
mum width plus 1/8 in. [3 mm] or 2.25 times the thick-
ness of the member, whichever is greater. 5.23.1 Details for complete joint penetration groove
welds made by SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except short cir-
5.22.5 Plug and slot welds are not permitted in cuiting transfer), or FCAW in butt, corner, and T-joints
quenched and tempered steels. which may be used without performing the joint welding

22
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 8
Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Prequalified Joints
Base Metal Thickness of Thicker Part (T) Minimum Size(1) of Fillet Weld
in. [mm] in. [mm]

T 1/4 [6] 1/8 [3]


1/4 [6] < T 1/2 [13] 3/16 [5]
1/2 [13] < T 3/4 [20] 1/4 [6]
T > 3/4 [20] 5/16 [8]T
Note:
(1) The weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part joined.

Table 9
Minimum Size of Full Strength Double Fillet Welds(1)
Full Strength(2) Weld Full Strength(2) Weld
Thinner Plate Thickness (t) (S = 3/4 t)(3) Thinner Plate Thickness (t) (S = 3/4 t)(3)

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm

1/4 6 3/16 5 1-3/8 35 1-1/32 26


5/16 8 15/64 6 1-1/2 38 1-1/8 28
3/8 10 9/32 8 1-5/8 41 1-7/32 31
7/16 11 21/64 9 1-3/4 45 1-5/16 34
1/2 13 3/8 10 2 50 1-1/2 38
9/16 14 27/64 11 2-1/8 54 1-19/32 41
5/8 16 15/32 12 2-1/4 57 1-11/16 43
3/4 20 9/16 15 2-3/8 60 1-25/32 45
7/8 22 21/32 16 2-1/2 64 1-7/8 48
1 25 3/4 20 2-5/8 67 1-31/32 50
1-1/8 29 27/32 22 2-3/4 70 2-1/16 53
1-1/4 32 15/16 24 3 75 2-1/4 56
Notes:

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) The fillet sizes listed do not take into consideration the effective throat thickness obtainable from GMAW, FCAW, and SAW processes.
(2) Filler metal properties match with base metal strength.
(3) S = Leg size of fillet.

procedure qualification test prescribed in 7.2 are found in 5.23.3 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified
Annex I, Figure I.1 and are subject to the limitations shielded metal arc welded joints may be used for
specified in 5.23.2 through 5.23.5. prequalified gas metal arc or flux cored arc welded
Complete joint penetration groove welds made by joints.
short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding shall be
qualified by the welding procedure qualification tests 5.23.4 Joint Root Openings. Joint root openings may
prescribed in 7.2. vary as noted in 5.23 and 5.24. However, for automatic
or machine welding using the FCAW, GMAW, and
5.23.2 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of SAW processes, the maximum root opening variation
groove welds specified in 5.23.1 may vary on design or (minimum to maximum opening as fit-up) may not
detailed drawings within the limits or tolerances shown exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm]. Variations greater than 1/8 in.
in the As Detailed column in Figure I.1. J- and U- [3 mm] shall be locally corrected prior to automatic or
grooves may be prepared before or after assembly. machine welding.

23
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

5.23.5 Corner Joints. For corner joints, the outside


Table 10
groove preparation may be in either or both members,
provided the basic groove configuration is not changed Minimum Weld Size for
and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds
welding operations without excessive melting. Base Metal Thickness of Minimum
5.24 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds Thicker Part Joined Weld Size(1)
in. [mm] in. [mm]
5.24.1 Details of partial joint penetration groove
welds made by SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except short cir- 1/8 [3] to 3/16 [5] inclusive 1/16 [2]
Over 3/16 [5] to 1/4 [6] inclusive 1/8 [3]
cuiting transfer), or FCAW in butt, corner, and T-joints Over 1/4 [6] to 1/2 [13] inclusive 3/16 [5]
which may be used without performing the joint welding Over 1/2 [13] to 3/4 [20] inclusive 1/4 [6]
procedure qualification tests prescribed in 7.2 are found Over 3/4 [20] to 1-1/2 [40] inclusive 5/16 [8]
in Annex I, Figure I.2 and are subject to the limitations Over 1-1/2 [40] to 2-1/4 [60] inclusive 3/8 [10]
specified in 5.24.2. Over 2-1/4 [60] to 6 [150] inclusive 1/2 [13]
Over 6 [150] 5/8 [16]
5.24.1.1 Definition. Except as provided in Figure Note:
I.1, groove welds without steel backing welded from one (1) Except the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner
side, and groove welds welded from both sides, but with- part.
out backgouging, are considered partial joint penetration
groove welds. Skewed T-joint welds, with angles smaller
than 60, are considered to be partial joint penetration
groove welds (see Figure 11).
condition as to enable qualified welders, welding opera-
5.24.1.2 All partial joint penetration groove welds tors, and tack welders to follow qualified welding proce-
made by short circuiting transfer gas metal arc welding dures and attain the results required by this specification.
shall be qualified by the joint welding procedure qualifi-
cation tests prescribed in 7.2. 6.1.3 Welding shall not be done when the ambient
temperature is lower than 0F [18C]. Note: 0F [18C]
5.24.2 Dimensional Tolerances. Dimensions of
does not mean the ambient environmental temperature,
groove welds specified in 5.24.1 may vary on design or
but the temperature in the immediate vicinity of the weld.
detailed drawings within the limits or tolerances shown
The ambient environmental temperature may be below
in the As Detailed column in Figure I.2. J- and U-
0F [18C], but a heated structure or shelter around
grooves may be prepared before or after assembly.
the area being welded could maintain the temperature
5.24.3 Minimum Weld Size. The minimum weld size adjacent to the weldment at 0F [18C] or higher. In
of partial joint penetration square-, single-, or double-V-, addition, welding shall not be done when surfaces
bevel-, J-, and U-groove welds shall be as shown in are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when
Table 10. welders are otherwise exposed to inclement weather
Shop or working drawings shall specify the depth of conditions.
bevel (S) applicable for the weld size (E) required for the
6.1.4 The sizes and lengths of welds shall not be less
welding process and position of welding to be used (see
than nor substantially more than those specified by
Figure I.2).
design requirements and detailed drawings. The location
5.24.4 Groove preparations detailed for prequalified of welds shall not be changed unless approved by the
shielded metal arc welded joints may be used for Engineer.
prequalified GMAW or FCAW.
6.2 Preparation of Materials
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

6.2.1 Surfaces and edges to be welded shall be


6. Workmanship smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears, cracks, and
other defects which would adversely affect the quality or
6.1 General
strength of the weld. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces
6.1.1 All applicable paragraphs of this section shall be adjacent to them shall be free from scale, slag, rust,
observed in the production and inspection of weldments grease, or other foreign material that will prevent proper
produced by any process under this specification. welding or produce objectionable fumes.
6.1.2 All items of equipment for welding and cutting 6.2.2 Thermal cutting may be employed in the prepa-
shall be designed, manufactured, and maintained in such ration of base metal for welding, provided that all scale,

24
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

slag, gouges, or other irregularities on the cut surface are 6.3.4 With the exclusion of electroslag and electrogas
removed by mechanical means after cutting. welding, and with the exception of 6.3.4.1, the dimen-
sions of the cross section of the groove welded joints
6.2.3 Backing strips, rings, and spacer blocks shall be
which vary from those shown on the detail drawings by
of the same general type of material as the base metal or
more than the following tolerances shall be referred to
as specified by the design drawings or approved welding
the Engineer for approval or correction.
procedure specification.
6.3 Assembly 6.3.4.1 Root openings wider than those permitted
in Figure 12, but not greater than twice the thickness of
6.3.1 The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be the thinner part or 3/4 in. [20 mm], whichever is less,
brought into as close contact as practicable. The root may be corrected by welding to acceptable dimensions
opening shall not exceed 3/16 in. [5 mm] except in cases prior to joining the parts by welding.
involving either shapes or plates 3 in. [75 mm] or greater
in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the 6.3.4.2 Root openings larger than those correctable
root opening cannot be closed sufficiently to meet this in accordance with 6.3.4.1 may be corrected by welding
tolerance. In such cases, a maximum root opening of only with the approval of the Engineer.
5/16 in. [8 mm] is acceptable provided a backing weld or
6.3.5 Grooves produced by gouging shall be in con-
suitable backing is used.9 If the separation is greater than
formance to the groove profile dimensions as specified in
1/16 in. [2 mm], the leg of the fillet weld shall be in-
Figures I.1 and I.2.
creased by the amount of the root opening or the Manu-
facturer shall demonstrate that the required effective 6.3.6 Members to be welded shall be brought into cor-
throat has been obtained. rect alignment and held in position by bolts, clamps,
The separation between faying surfaces of plug and wedges, guy lines, struts, and other suitable devices, or
slot welds, and of butt joints landing on a backing, shall by tack welds until welding has been completed. The use
not exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm]. The use of fillers is prohib- of jigs and fixtures is recommended where practicable.
ited except as specified on the drawings or as specially Suitable allowances shall be made for warpage and
approved by the Engineer. shrinkage.
6.3.2 The parts to be joined by partial joint penetra- 6.3.7 All tack welds shall be made using the same
tion groove welds parallel to the length of the member, grade welding electrode or filler metal as the final weld,
shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The unless otherwise specified and qualified by testing. Tack
root opening between parts shall not exceed 3/16 in. welds may be incorporated in the final weld if they have
[5 mm] except in cases involving rolled shapes or plates been deposited by qualified welders using an approved
3 in. [75 mm] or greater in thickness if, after straighten- welding procedure specification, and after visual exami-
ing and in assembly, the root opening cannot be closed nation shows them to be of acceptable quality. Multiple-
sufficiently to meet this tolerance. In such cases, a maxi- pass tack welds shall be deposited by a cascaded
mum root opening of 5/16 in. [8 mm] is applicable pro- sequence.
vided a backing weld or suitable backing is used and the
final weld meets the requirements for weld size. 6.3.8 Welding procedures with complete joint pene-
tration where the joint is welded from both sides shall
6.3.3 Parts to be joined by groove welded butt joints
require either backgouging of the underside of the root
shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts are effectively
pass before welding the second side or it shall be demon-
restrained against bending due to eccentricity in align-
strated by actual welding tests that backgouging may be
ment, an offset not exceeding 10% of the thickness of the
omitted without detriment to the weld. Backgouging
thinner part joined, but in no case more than 1/8 in.
shall require removal of the underside of the root pass to
[3 mm], shall be permitted as a departure from the theo-
sound metal as indicated by liquid penetrant or magnetic
retical alignment. In correcting misalignment in such
particle inspection. Welding procedures that omit back-
cases, the parts shall not be drawn in to a greater slope
gouging shall be tested to demonstrate that the resulting
than 0.5 in 12. Measurement of offset shall be based
welds are consistently free of weld defects as indicated
upon the center line of parts unless otherwise shown on
by close examination of weld cross sections and side-
the drawings.
bend tests.

9. Backing may be of flux, glass tape, iron powder, or similar 6.3.9 Each pass of deposited weld metal shall be thor-
materials. Backing welds may be made by means of shielded oughly cleaned using slagging picks, grinding wheels, or
metal arc welding root passes deposited with low hydrogen wire brushes. Pneumatic chippers may be used provided
electrodes or other arc welding processes. they do not peen or distort the weld.

25 --`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

6.3.10 Preheating and interpass temperature control


shall ensure that the full thickness of the weld joint prep-
aration and adjacent base metal for a distance at least
equal to the thickness of the thickest welded part (but not
less than 3 in. [75 mm]) in all directions from the point of
welding are within the temperature range specified by
the welding procedure specification.
6.3.11 When required by contract plans or specifica-
tions, welded assemblies shall be stress relieved by the
process specified in the contract (see Section 10).

7. Qualification

Part AGeneral Qualification


Requirements

7.1 Approved Procedures


7.1.1 Welding procedures which conform to the appli-
cable provisions of Sections 4, 5, and 6 and Table 11 of
this specification shall be considered as prequalified and
are exempt from tests otherwise required for qualification.
7.1.2 Steels having weldability within a given mate-
rial class as defined in Table 11 shall be considered
prequalified.
7.1.3 The welding procedure to be used shall be pre-
pared by the Manufacturer as a Welding Procedure Spec-
ification (WPS) and shall be available to those
authorized to examine it.
7.1.4 AWS B2.1 Standard Welding Procedure Speci-
fications which conform to the applicable provisions of
Sections 4, 5, and 6 of this specification and signed by
the Manufacturer shall be considered approved and are
exempt from tests otherwise required from qualification.
7.2 Other Procedures. Welding procedures which do
not meet the requirements of 7.1 that are employed in
executing contract work under this specification shall be
qualified to meet this specification as prescribed in Part
B of this section. The customer should accept evidence
Figure Legend: of previous qualification of the joint welding procedures
a = Groove Angle Tolerance to be employed.
R = Root Opening Tolerance
f = Root Face Tolerance 7.3 Welders, Welding Operators, and Tack Welders
Note: The groove configurations are for illustration only.
7.3.1 All welders, welding operators, and tack weld-
ers employed to weld under this specification shall have
Figure 12Workmanship Tolerances in been qualified by the tests prescribed in Part C, D, and E
Assembly of Groove Welded Joints of this section. Welders who are currently certified

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 26
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 11
Maximum Allowable Chemical Composition Limits for Steels Prequalified for Welding
Material Class Class I Class II Class III Class IV Class V(1)

Maximum Ultimate Tensile Strength, ksi [MPa] 80 [550] 85 [585] 90 [620] 100 [690] 135 [930]

Maximum Carbon Equivalent(2) 0.38 0.48 0.63 0.54 0.74


Carbon 0.23 0.30 0.24 0.26 0.22
Manganese 0.90 1.35 1.35 1.65 1.50
Phosphorus 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.035 0.035
Sulfur 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Silicon 0.60 0.60 0.90 0.30 0.90
Nickel 1.25 0.25(3) 1.50
Chemical
Chromium 1.00 0.20(3) 2.00
Composition
Maximums Molybdenum 0.25 0.060(3) 0.65
(all in weight %)
Vanadium(4) 0.10(5) 0.15 0.08
Residual Quantities Only
Titanium 0.07 0.07 0.10
for Classes I and II
Zirconium 0.15 0.15 0.15
Niobium (Columbium) 0.04(5) Note (3) Note (3)

Copper 1.00 0.35(3) 0.50
Boron Residual 0.0005(3) 0.006
Notes:
(1) The only prequalified materials in Class V are ASTM A514, A517, and A709.
(2) Carbon Equivalent (CE) = %C + %Mn/6 + %Mo/4 + %Cr/5 + %Ni/15 + %V/5.
(3) Residual quantities only, Nb is not specified.
(4) Caution: The filler metal or base metal should not exceed 0.05% if the welds are to be stress relieved because a decrease in fracture toughness may
result.
(5) Maximum for niobium + vanadium = 0.10.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
within the requirements of AWS QC7, Standard for Part BWelding Procedure
Certified Welders, shall be considered qualified within
the limits of the applicable WPS and exempt from tests
Qualification
otherwise required for qualification. The Manufacturer
should accept evidence of previous AWS or ASME qual- 7.5 General. Welding procedures developed from this
ification of the welders, welding operators, and tack specification shall be considered to have been qualified
welders to be employed. by the tests prescribed herein subject to the limitation of
variables in 7.6. Any requalifications or new qualifica-
7.3.2 Radiographic examination of a welders or tions shall be made in conformance to the requirements
welding operators qualification test plate may be made of this specification. The welding procedure specifica-
in lieu of the guided bend tests prescribed in Part C and tion used in production shall comply in all respects with
D of this section, except for GMAW-S (gas metal arc the procedure qualification record within the limitations
welding in the short circuiting mode). of 7.6.

7.4 Qualification Responsibility. Each Manufacturer 7.6 Limitation of Variables


shall conduct the tests required by this specification to
qualify the welding procedures and the welders, welding 7.6.1 When it is necessary to establish a welding
operators, and tack welders who will apply these proce- procedure by qualification as required by 7.2 or
dures, except as permitted in 7.1. contract specifications, the following rules apply, and

27
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

the procedure shall be recorded by the Manufacturer as a (3) An increase in the diameter of the electrode used,
welding procedure specification. greater than that called for in the procedure specification.
(4) A change of more than 15% above or below the
7.6.1.1 Qualification of a welding procedure estab-
specified mean arc voltage and amperage for each size
lished with carbon or low-alloy steels not listed in 7.6.1.2
electrode used.
and having minimum specified yield strength less than
50 ksi [345 MPa], shall be considered as a procedure (5) For a specified groove, a change of more than
qualification for welding any other carbon or low-alloy 25% in the specified number of passes. If the area of the
steel or combination having a minimum specified yield groove is increased, it is also permissible to increase the
strength equal to or less than that of the base metal used number of passes in proportion to the increased area.
in the test and having the element limits that are specified (6) A change in position in which welding is done as
in Classes I through III of Table 11. defined in 7.9.
(7) A change in the type of groove, e.g., a change
7.6.1.2 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- from a V- to a U-groove.
lished with ASTM A 242, A 441, A 537 Grade A, A 572 (8) A change in the shape of any one type of groove
Grade 50, A 588, API 5LX Grade 42, or ABS Grade AH, involving: a decrease in the included angle of the groove,
DH, or EH shall be considered as procedure qualification a decrease in the root opening of the groove, an increase
for welding the other steels of this group, combinations in the root face of the groove, or the omission, but not the
of them, or carbon or low-alloy steels having a lower inclusion, of backing material.
minimum specified yield strength. (9) A decrease of more that 25F [15C] in the mini-
7.6.1.3 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- mum specified preheat temperature.
lished with carbon or low-alloy steel having a minimum (10) In the case of vertical welding, a change from the
specified yield strength greater than 50 ksi [345 MPa] progression specified for any pass from upward to down-
shall qualify the procedure for welding only base metals ward, or vice versa.
of the same material specification and grade or type hav-
7.6.2.2 Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
ing the same minimum specified yield strength as the
base metal tested. An exception to this is appropriate (1) A change in electrode and flux combination not
when a reduction in yield strength occurs due to an covered by AWS A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel
increase in material thickness. For example, a procedure Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, or
qualified with a 1 in. [25 mm] thick, 100 ksi [690 MPa] AWS A5.23, Specification for Low Alloy Steel Elec-
yield strength base metal also qualifies for a 3 in. trodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding.
[75 mm] thick, 90 ksi [620 MPa] yield strength base (2) A change increasing filler metal strength level.
metal of the same material specification. (3) A change in electrode diameter when using an
alloy flux.10
7.6.1.4 Qualification of a welding procedure estab- (4) A change in the number of electrodes used; e.g.,
lished with a combination of carbon or low-alloy steels single electrode to multiple electrodes, or vice versa.
of different minimum specified yield strengths, one of
(5) A change in the type of current (ac or dc) or
which is greater than 50 ksi [345 MPa], shall qualify the
polarity.
procedure for welding that high yield strength base metal
(6) A change of more than 10% above or below the
to any other of those base metals having a minimum
specified mean amperage for each size electrode used.
specified yield strength equal to or less than that of the
lower strength base metal used in the test. (7) A change of more than 7% above or below the
specified mean arc voltage for each size electrode used.
7.6.2 The changes set forth in the following schedule (8) A change of more than 15% above or below the
shall be considered essential changes in a welding proce- specified mean travel speed.
dure and shall require establishing a new procedure by (9) A change of more than 10% or 1/8 in. [3 mm],
qualification. When a combination of welding processes
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

whichever is greater, in the longitudinal spacing of the


is used, the variables applicable to each process shall arcs.
apply. (10) A change of more than 10% or 1/16 in. [2 mm],
7.6.2.1 Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) whichever is greater, in the lateral spacing of the arcs.
(1) A change increasing filler metal strength level; (11) A change of more than 10% in degrees in the
e.g., a change from E70XX to E80XX [E49XX to angular position of any parallel electrode.
E55XX], but not vice versa.
(2) A change from a low-hydrogen-type electrode to 10. An alloy flux is defined as a flux upon which the alloy con-
a non-low-hydrogen type of electrode, but not vice versa. tent of the weld metal is largely dependent.

28
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(12) A change in the angle of electrodes in mecha- the root face of a groove, or the omission, but not the
nized or automatic welding of more than 3 in the inclusion, of backing material.
direction of travel and 5 normal to the direction of (14) A decrease of more than 25F [15C] in the mini-
travel. mum specified preheat temperature.
(13) For a specified groove, a change of more than (15) In vertical welding, a change from the progres-
25% in the specified number of passes. If the area of the sion specified for any pass from upward to downward, or
groove is increased, it is also permissible to increase the vice versa.
number of passes in proportion to the increased area. (16) A change in type of welding current (ac or dc),
(14) A change in position in which welding is done as polarity, or mode of metal transfer across the arc.
defined in 7.9.
(15) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change 7.6.2.4 Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)
from a V- to a U-groove. (1) A change in electrode type not covered by AWS
(16) A change in the shape of any one type of groove A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for
involving: a decrease in the included angle of the groove, Flux Cored Arc Welding, or AWS A5.29, Specification
a decrease in the root opening of a groove, an increase in for Low Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc
the root face of a groove, or the omission, but not the Welding.
inclusion, of backing material. (2) A change increasing filler metal strength level.
(17) A decrease of more than 25F [15C] in the mini- (3) An increase in the diameter of electrode used over
mum specified preheat temperature. that called for in the procedure specification.
(18) An increase in the diameter of the electrode used, (4) A change in the number of electrodes used; e.g.,
greater than that called for in the procedure specification. single electrode to multiple electrodes, or vice versa.
7.6.2.3 Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) (5) A change from a single gas to any other single gas
(1) A change in electrode type not covered by AWS or to a mixture of gases or a change in specified percent-
A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for age composition of gas mixture not covered by AWS
Gas Shielded Arc Welding, or AWS A5.28, Specification A5.32, Specification for Shielding Gases.
for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc (6) A change of more than 10% above or below the
Welding. specified mean amperage for each size electrode used.
(2) A change increasing filler metal strength level. (7) A change of more that 7% above or below the
(3) A change in electrode diameter. specified mean arc voltage for each size electrode used.
(4) A change in the number of electrodes used; e.g., (8) A change of more than 10% above or below the
single electrode to multiple electrodes, or vice versa. specified mean travel speed.
(5) A change from a single gas to any other single gas (9) An increase of 25% or more or a decrease of 10%
or to a mixture of gases or a change in specified percent- or more in the rate of flow of shielding gas or mixture.
age composition of gas mixture not covered by AWS
(10) For a specified groove, a change of more than
A5.32, Specification for Shielding Gases.
25% in the specified number of passes. If the area of the
(6) A change of more than 10% above or below the groove is increased, it is also permissible to increase the
specified mean amperage for each size electrode used. number of passes in proportion to the increased area.
(7) A change of more than 7% above or below the
(11) A change in the position in which welding is done

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
specified mean arc voltage for each size electrode used.
as defined in 7.9.
(8) A change of more than 10% above or below the
specified mean travel speed. (12) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change
(9) An increase of 25% or more or a decrease of 10% from a V- to a U-groove.
or more in the rate of flow of shielding gas or mixture. (13) A change in the shape of any one type of groove
(10) For a specified groove, a change of more than involving: a decrease in the included angle of the groove,
25% in the specified number of passes. If the area of the a decrease in the root opening of a groove, an increase in
groove is increased, it is also permissible to increase the the root face of a groove or the omission, but not the
number of passes in proportion to the increased area. inclusion, of backing material.
(11) A change in the position in which welding is done (14) A decrease of more than 25F [15C] in the mini-
as defined in 7.9. mum specified preheat temperature.
(12) A change in the type of groove; e.g., a change (15) In vertical welding, a change from the progres-
from a V- to U-groove. sion specified for any pass from upward to downward, or
(13) A change in the shape of any one type of groove vice versa.
involving: a decrease in the included angle of the groove, (16) A change in type of welding current (ac or dc),
a decrease in the root opening of a groove, an increase in polarity or mode of metal transfer across arc.

29
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

7.6.2.5 Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) (4) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse length
(1) A change in the joint design, e.g., a change from a affecting proximity of filler metal to the molding shoes
U- to a V-groove. by more than 1/8 in. [3 mm].
(2) The deletion of a backing. (5) A change in flux burden exceeding 30%.
(3) A change in the base metal thickness beyond the (6) A change in shielding gas flow rate exceeding
range qualified in Table 13. 25%.
(4) The addition or deletion of consumable inserts. (7) A change in design of molding shoes, either fixed
(5) A change in position in which welding is done as or movable, as follows: nonfusing air cooled solid to
defined in 7.9. water cooled or vice versa, metallic to nonmetallic or
(6) A decrease of more than 25F [15C] in the mini- vice versa, nonfusing to fusing or vice versa, or a reduc-
mum specified preheat temperature. tion in any cross-sectional dimension or area of solid
(7) The omission of trailing shielding gas. nonfusing shoe exceeding 25%.
(8) The omission of back shielding gas. (8) A change of welding position from vertical by
more than 10.
(9) A change in shielding gas from a single gas to any
other single gas or to a mixture of gases, or a change (9) A change from alternating current to direct cur-
in specified nominal percentage composition of gas rent, or vice versa, or a change in polarity for direct cur-
mixture. rent.
(10) Addition or deletion of pulsing welding current. (10) A change in welding power source volt-ampere
characteristics from constant voltage to constant current,
7.6.2.6 Electroslag Welding (ESW) and Electro- or vice versa.
gas Welding (EGW) (11) An increase or decrease change of voltage
(1) A change in filler metal or consumable guide exceeding 10%.
metal composition. (12) A change in square groove root opening exceed-
(2) A change in consumable guide metal core cross- ing 1/4 in. [6 mm].
sectional area exceeding 30%. (13) A change in groove design other than square
(3) A change in flux system (cored, magnetic elec- groove, reducing groove cross-sectional area.
trode, external flux, etc.). (14) An increase or decrease in speed of vertical
(4) A change in flux composition including consum- travel, if not an automatic function of arc length or depo-
able guide coating. sition rate, exceeding 20% except as necessary to com-
(5) A change in shielding gas composition of any one pensate for variation in joint opening.
constituent of more than 5% of the total flow.
7.7 Types of Tests and Purposes. The types of tests out-
(6) A change in welding current exceeding 20%.
lined below are to determine the mechanical properties
(7) A change in groove design, other than square and soundness of welded joints made under a given
groove, increasing groove cross-sectional area. procedure specification. The tests used are as follows:
(8) A change in joint thickness (t) outside the limits
of 0.5T to 1.1T where T is the thickness used for the pro- (1) Tests for Complete Joint Penetration Groove
cedure qualification. Welds:
(9) A change in number of electrodes. (a) Reduced section tension test (for tensile
(10) A change to a combination with any other weld- strength),
ing process or method. (b) Root bend test (for soundness),
(11) A change in postweld heat treatment. (c) Face bend test (for soundness),
(d) Side bend test (for soundness),
7.6.3 The following changes in a qualified electroslag
(e) All-weld-metal test (for mechanical proper-
or electrogas procedure shall require requalification of
tieselectroslag or electrogas).
the procedure by radiographic or ultrasonic testing in
conformance to the requirements of 8.2 or 8.3. (2) Test for Fillet and Partial Penetration Groove
(1) A change in filler metal diameter exceeding 1/32 in. Welds: Macroetch test (for soundness)
[1 mm]. 7.8 Base Metal and Its Preparation. The base metal
(2) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse speed and its preparation for welding shall comply with the
exceeding 10 in/min [4 mm/s]. welding procedure specification. For all types of welded
(3) A change in filler metal oscillation traverse dwell joints, the length of the weld and the dimensions of the
time exceeding two seconds, except as necessary to com- base metal shall be such as to provide sufficient material
pensate for variation in joint opening. for the required test specimens.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

30
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

7.9 Position of Test Welds. All welds that will be connections. The test pipe shall be inclined at 45 with
encountered in actual construction shall be classified as the horizontal as illustrated in Figure 16E. The pipe or
being (1) flat, (2) horizontal, (3) vertical, or (4) overhead, tube shall not be rotated during welding.
in accordance with the definitions of welding positions
7.9.3 Fillet Welds (see Figure 17). In making the tests
illustrated in Figures 13 and 14. Each procedure shall be
to qualify fillet welds, test plates shall be welded in the
tested in the manner illustrated below for each position
positions outlined below:
for which it is to be qualified. Welding position limita-
tions for procedure qualifications are shown in Table 12. 7.9.3.1 Position 1F (Flat). The test plates shall be
7.9.1 Groove Plate Test Welds (see Figure 15). placed so that each fillet weld is deposited with its axis
When making the tests to qualify groove welds, test approximately horizontal and its throat approximately
plates shall be welded in the following positions: vertical as illustrated in Figure 17A.

7.9.1.1 Position 1G (Flat). The test plates shall be 7.9.3.2 Position 2F (Horizontal). The test plates
placed in an approximately horizontal plane and the weld shall be placed so that each fillet weld is deposited on the
metal deposited from the upper side as illustrated in Fig- upper side of the horizontal surface and against the verti-
ure 15A. cal surface as illustrated in Figure 17B.

7.9.1.2 Position 2G (Horizontal). The test plates 7.9.3.3 Position 3F (Vertical). The test plates shall
shall be placed in an approximately vertical plane with be placed in an approximately vertical plane and each fil-
the groove approximately horizontal as illustrated in Fig- let weld deposited on the vertical surface as illustrated in
ure 15B. Figure 17C.

7.9.1.3 Position 3G (Vertical). The test plates 7.9.3.4 Position 4F (Overhead). The test plates
shall be placed in an approximately vertical plane with shall be placed so that each fillet weld is deposited on the
the groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure underside of the horizontal surface and against the verti-
15C. cal surface as illustrated in Figure 17D.

7.9.1.4 Position 4G (Overhead). The test plates 7.9.4 Fillet WeldsPipe Positions (see Figure 18).
shall be placed in an approximately horizontal plane and 7.9.4.1 Flat Position 1F. The test pipe shall be
the weld metal deposited from the underside as illus- placed with its axis inclined at 45 to the horizontal and
trated in Figure 15D. rotated during welding as illustrated in Figure 18A. The
7.9.2 Groove Pipe Test Welds (see Figure 16). When weld metal is deposited from above so that at the point of
making the tests to qualify groove welds, test pipe shall deposition, the axis of the weld is horizontal and the
be welded in the following positions: throat vertical.

7.9.2.1 Position 1G (Pipe Horizontal Rolled). 7.9.4.2 Horizontal Position 2F and 2F Rotated
The test pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and (1) The position 2F test pipe shall be placed with its
the groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure axis vertical so that the weld is deposited on upper side
16A. The pipe shall be rotated during welding so the of the horizontal surface and against the vertical surface.
weld metal is deposited from the upper side. The axis of the weld will be horizontal and the pipe is not
rotated during welding as illustrated in Figure 18B.
7.9.2.2 Position 2G (Pipe Vertical Fixed). The
(2) The position 2F rotated test pipe shall be placed
test pipe shall be placed with its axis vertical and the
with its axis horizontal and the axis of the deposited weld
welding groove approximately horizontal as illustrated in
in the vertical plane as illustrated in Figure 18C. The
Figure 16B. The pipe shall not be rotated during welding.
pipe is rotated during welding.
7.9.2.3 Position 5G (Pipe Horizontal Fixed). The
7.9.4.3 Overhead Position 4F. The test pipe shall
test pipe shall be placed with its axis horizontal and the
be placed with its axis vertical so that the weld is depos-
groove approximately vertical as illustrated in Figure
ited on the underside of the horizontal surface and
16C. The pipe shall not be rotated during welding.
against the vertical surface. The axis of the weld will be
7.9.2.4 Position 6G (Pipe Inclined Fixed). The horizontal, and the pipe is not rotated during welding as
test pipe shall be inclined at 45 with the horizontal as illustrated in Figure 18D.
illustrated in Figure 16D. The pipe shall not be rotated
7.9.4.4 Multiple Position 5F. The test pipe shall
during welding.
be placed with its axis horizontal and the axis of the
7.9.2.5 Position 6GR. Test for complete joint deposited weld in the vertical plane as illustrated in Fig-
penetration groove welds of tubular T-, Y- and K- ure 18E. The pipe is not rotated during welding.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

31
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Tabulation of Positions of Groove Welds


Position Diagram Reference Inclination of Axis Rotation of Face
Flat A 0 to 15 150 to 210
80 to 150
Horizontal B 0 to 15
210 to 280
0 to 80
Overhead C 0 to 80
280 to 360
D 15 to 80 80 to 280
Vertical
E 80 to 90 0 to 360

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

General Notes:
(a) The horizontal reference plane is always taken to lie below the weld under consideration.
(b) The inclination of axis is measured from the horizontal reference plane toward the vertical reference plane.
(c) The angle of rotation of the face is determined by a line perpendicular to the theoretical face of the weld
which passes through the axis of the weld. The reference position (0) of rotation of the face invariably
points in the direction opposite to that in which the axis angle increases. When looking at point P, the angle
of rotation of the face of the weld is measured in a clockwise direction from the reference position (0).

Figure 13Positions of Groove Welds

32
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Tabulation of Positions of Fillet Welds


Position Diagram Reference Inclination of Axis Rotation of Face
Flat A 0 to 15 150 to 210
125 to 150
Horizontal B 0 to 15
210 to 235
0 to 125
Overhead C 0 to 80
235 to 360
D 15 to 80 125 to 235
Vertical
E 80 to 90 0 to 360

Figure 14Positions of Fillet Welds

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
33
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 12
Procedure QualificationType and Position Limitations
Type of Weld and Welding Position Qualified(1)

Qualification Test Plate Pipe

Plate or Pipe
Test Weld Test Positions(2) Groove Fillet Groove Fillet

Plate-Groove 1G F F F(3) F(3)


Complete Joint 2G H F, H F, H(3) F, H(3)
Penetration 3G V V
4G OH OH

Plate-Groove 1G F F(3) F(3) F(3)


2G H F, H(3) F, H(3) F, H(3)
Partial Joint Penetration 3G V
4G OH

Plate Fillet 1F F F(3)


2F F, H F, H(3)
3F V V(3)
4F OH OH(3)

Pipe-Groove 1G Rotated F F F F
2G F, H F, H F, H F, H
Complete Joint Penetration 5G F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
6G F, H, V, OH(4) F, H, V, OH F, H, V, OH(4) F, H, V, OH(4)
6GR Only All(5) All All(6) All

Pipe-Fillet 1F Rotated F F(1)


2F F, H F,H
2F Rolled F, H F, H(7)
4F F, H, OH F, H, OH
5F All All
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Notes:
(1) Positions of welding: F= flat, H = horizontal, V = vertical, OH = overhead.
(2) See Figures 15, 16, 17, and 18.
(3) Qualifies for welding pipe or tubing over 24 in. [600 mm] in diameter.
(4) Qualifies for complete joint penetration groove welds in all positions except T-, Y-, and K-connections.
(5) Limited to prequalified joint details (see 5.23.1 and Figure I.1).
(6) Qualifies for T-, Y-, K-connections, and any prequalified joint detail (see 5.23.1 and Figure I.1).
(7) Qualifies for horizontal fillet welds on rolled pipes only.

7.10 Production of Test Samples. The welding proce- thickness of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in making
dure specification used to produce test samples shall the qualification. In addition to these tests, the test plate
comply in all respects with the welding procedure speci- for GMAW, FCAW, ESW, and EGW shall be radio-
fication that will be used in production. graphically or ultrasonically tested (see Section 8.)
7.11.1.2 Qualification of groove welds for T- or
7.11 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation
corner joints shall be butt joints having the same groove
configuration as the T- or corner joint to be used in
7.11.1 Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
production.
7.11.1.1 The type and number of specimens that 7.11.1.3 The test specimens shall be cut from the
shall be tested to qualify a welding procedure are shown test plates, pipe, or tubing as shown in Figures 19
in Table 13 together with the range of thickness that is through 23, whichever is applicable, and shall be pre-
qualified for use in production. The range is based on the pared for testing in accordance with Figures A5 through

34
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 15Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds

A8, A11, A12, A14, and A15 in AWS B4.0-98 or AWS 7.12 Method of Testing Specimens
B4.0M:2000, Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing
of Welds, as applicable. 7.12.1 Reduced Section Tension Specimens. Before
testing, the least width and corresponding thickness of
7.11.2 Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welds. A the reduced section shall be measured in inches [milli-
sample of the type of groove design using the same joint meters]. The cross-sectional area shall be obtained as
to be used in production, except that the depth of groove follows:
need not exceed 1 in. [25 mm], shall be made and three
macroetched cross sections prepared to demonstrate that Cross-sectional area = width thickness.
the designated effective throat thickness is obtained and
that the requirements of the procedure specification are The specimen shall be ruptured under tensile load and
met. the maximum load in pounds [Newtons] shall be deter-
mined. The tensile strength in pounds per square inch
7.11.3 Fillet Welds. The type and number of speci- [Pascals] shall be obtained by dividing the maximum
mens that shall be tested to qualify a welding procedure load by the cross-sectional area.
are shown in Table 14. Test specimens shall be prepared
by cutting the test plate, pipe or tubing as shown in Fig- 7.12.2 Macroetch Test. Etching shall be made with a
ures 24 through 26, as applicable. suitable solution to give a clear definition of the weld.

35
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 16Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds

36
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 17Positions of Test Plates for Fillet Welds

7.12.3 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens. side showing the greater defects, if any, oriented to be in
Each specimen shall be bent in a jig having the contour tension. The plunger shall force the specimen into the die
shown in Figures A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0-98 or until the specimen becomes U-shaped. The weld and
AWS B4.0M:2000, Standard Methods for Mechanical heat-affected zones (HAZs) shall be centered and shall
Testing of Welds, in accordance with those illustrations. be completely within the bent portion of the specimen
Any convenient means may be used to move the plunger after testing.
member with relation to the die member. When using the wraparound jig, the specimen shall be
The specimen shall be placed on the die member of clamped on one end so that the specimen does not slide
the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend specimens during the bending operation. The weld and heat-
shall be oriented so that the face of the weld will be in affected zones shall be completely within the bent por-
tension. Root-bend and fillet weld soundness specimens tion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens shall
shall be oriented so that the root of the weld will be in be removed from the jig when the outer roll has been
tension. Side-bend specimens shall be placed with the moved 180 from the starting point.

37
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 18Positions of Test Pipe for Fillet Welds

Figure 19Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


for 2 in. [50 mm] or 3 in. [75 mm] Diameter Pipe

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

38
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 13
Procedure QualificationNumber and Type of Test Specimens and
Range of Thickness Qualified for Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welds
1. Test on Plate
Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Maximum(2)
Plate
Plate Number of Reduced- Thickness (T)
Thickness (T) Tested Sample Welds Section Root Face Side Qualified
in. [mm] per Position NDT(1) Tension Bend Bend Bend in. [mm]
1/8 [3] T < 3/8 [10] 1 Yes 2 2 2 1/8 [3] to 2T
T = 3/8 [10] 1 Yes 2 2 2 3/4 [20]
3/8 [10] < T < 1 [25] 1 Yes 2 4 2T
T 1 [25] 1 Yes 2 4 Unlimited
2. Tests on Pipe or Tubing
Pipe Size Number
Sample Weld of NDT Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Pipe or Tube Size Qualified
Sample Other
Wall Thickness
Wall Welds Inspections Reduced-
in. [mm]
Diameter Thickness, T per [See Notes Section Root Face Side Diameter
in. [mm] in. [mm] Position (3) and (4)] Tension Bend Bend Bend in. [mm] Min. Max.
2 [50] 0.218
Sch. 80 [5.5] 3/4 [20]
or 2 Yes 2 2 2 through 0.125 0.674
3 [75] 0.216 4 [100]
Sch. 40 [5.5]
6 [150] 0.562
Sch. 120 [14] 4 [100]
or 1 Yes 2 4 and 0.187 [5] Any
8 [200] 0.500 over
Sch. 80 [13]
Job Size Pipe or Tubing
Nominal Wall
Pipe Diam. Thickness
in. [mm] in. [mm]
1/8 T 3/8 Test
1 Yes 2 2 2 0.125 [3] 2T
[3 T 10] Diam.
3/8 < T < 3/4 1 Yes 2 4 Test T/2 2T
< 24 [600]
[10 < T < 20] Diam.
T 3/4 [20] Test
1 Yes 2 4 0.375 [10] Any
Diam.
1/8 T 3/8 Test
1 Yes 2 2 2 0.125 [3] 2T
[3 T 10] Diam.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

24 [600] 3/8 < T < 3/4


1 Yes 2 4 24 [600] T/2 2T
[10 < T < 20]
T 3/4 [20] 1 Yes 2 4 24 [600] 0.375 [10] Any
3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas Welds

Plate Test Specimens Required (see 7.11.1.3) Plate


Thickness Number of Reduced- All-Weld-Metal Thickness
Tested Sample Welds NDT (1), (5) Section Tension Tension Side-Bend Impact Test(6) Qualified
(7)T (7) 1 Yes 2 1 4 8 0.5T to 1.1T
Notes:
(1) All welded test plates shall be visually inspected.
(2) For square groove welds, the maximum thickness qualified shall be limited to thickness tested.
(3) All welded test pipes or tubing shall be visually inspected.
(4) For pipe or tubing, the full circumference of the completed weld shall be tested by RT or UT prior to mechanical testing.
(5) 6 in. [150 mm] minimum length of weld shall be test by radiographic or ultrasonic methods prior to mechanical testing.
(6) If specified.
(7) T is the test plate thickness.

39
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 20Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

for 6 in. [150 mm] or 8 in. [200 mm] Diameter Pipe

Figure 21Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


for Electroslag and Electrogas Welded Plate

40
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 22Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


for Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick

Figure 23Procedure QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


for Welded Test Plate 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick

41
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 14
Procedure QualificationNumber and Type of Test Specimens
Required and Range of Thickness Qualified for Fillet Welds
Test Specimens
Required Sizes Qualified

Number of Macroetch
Welds per (see 7.28.3 and Plate/Pipe
Test Specimen(1) Fillet Size Procedure 7.29.3) Thickness Fillet Size

Single-pass, 1 in each 3 faces Unlimited Max. tested


max. size to be used position to be used single-pass
in construction
Plate T-test
(see Figure 24)
Multiple-pass, 1 in each 3 faces Unlimited Min. tested
min. size to be used position to be used multiple-pass
in construction and larger

Single-pass, 1 in each 3 faces (except Unlimited Max. tested


max. size to be used position to be used for 4F and 5F, single-pass
in construction (see Table 12) 4 faces required) and smaller
Pipe to Pipe Test(2)
(see Figure 25)
Multiple-pass, 1 in each 3 faces (except Unlimited Min. tested
min. size to be used position to be used for 4F and 5F, multiple-pass
in construction (see Table 12) 4 faces required) and larger
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Single-pass, 1 in each 3 faces (except Unlimited Max. tested


max. size to be used position to be used for 4F and 5F, single-pass
in construction (see Table 12) 4 faces required) and smaller
Pipe to Plate T-test(2)
(see Figure 26)
Multiple-pass, 1 in each 3 faces (except Unlimited Min. tested
min. size to be used position to be used for 4F and 5F, multiple-pass
in construction (see Table 12) 4 faces required) and larger

Notes:
(1) All welded test plates shall be visually inspected.
(2) See Table 13 for pipe diameter qualification.

7.12.4 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test. The test speci- face shall contain no discontinuities exceeding the
men shall be tested in conformance to ASTM A 370, following criteria:
Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of (1) 1/8 in. [3 mm] measured in any direction on the
Steel Products. surface.
7.12.5 The radiographic procedure and technique (2) 3/8 in. [10 mm]the sum of the greatest dimen-
shall be in conformance to the requirements of 8.2. sions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32 in. [1 mm],
but less than or equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm].
7.13 Test Results Required. The requirements for the (3) 1/4 in. [6 mm]the maximum corner crack,
test results shall be as follows: except when that corner crack resulted from visible slag
inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the
7.13.1 Reduced Section Tension Test. The tensile
1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum shall apply.
strength shall be not less than the minimum of the speci-
fied tensile range of the base metal used. Specimens with corner cracks exceeding 1/4 in.
[6 mm] with no evidence of slag inclusions or other
7.13.2 Root, Face, and Side Bend Tests. The convex fusion type discontinuities shall be disregarded and a
surface of the bend test specimen shall be visually exam- replacement test specimen from the original weldment
ined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the sur- shall be tested.

42
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Weld Sizes
Size T1 min* T2 min*
in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]
3/16 [5]0 1/2 [13]1/ 3/16 [5]0
1/4 [6]0 3/4 [20]1/ 1/4 [6]0
5/16 [8]0 1 [25] 5/16 [8]0
3/8 [10] 1 [25] 3/8 [10]
1/2 [13] 1 [25] 1/2 [13]
5/8 [16] 1 [25] 5/8 [16]
3/4 [20] 1 [25] 3/4 [20]
>3/4 [20]> 1 [25] 0/1 [25]

*Note: Where the maximum plate thickness used in production is less than the value shown
in the table, the maximum thickness of the production pieces may be substituted for T1 and
T2.

Figure 24Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Plate to Plate)

7.13.3 Macroetch Tests. The specimens shall be 7.13.5 Nondestructive Testing


examined for defects and any which have defects prohib-
7.13.5.1 For acceptable qualification, the weld, as
ited in 8.5.6 shall be considered as failed. The specimens
revealed by the radiograph or ultrasonic testing, shall
shall have the designated effective throat for partial joint
conform to the requirements of 8.2 and 8.3, whichever
penetration groove welds. Fillet weld specimens shall
are applicable.
show fusion to the root, but not necessarily beyond, and
shall meet the size and tolerance criteria stated in 8.1.7.2 7.13.5.2 For acceptable qualification, the pipe
and 8.1.8.2. weld, when inspected visually, shall conform to the fol-
lowing requirements:
7.13.4 All-Weld-Metal Tensiles (Electroslag and (1) The weld shall be free of cracks.
Electrogas). The mechanical properties shall not be less (2) All craters shall be filled to the full cross section
than those specified in the filler metal requirements. of the weld.

43
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Note: Pipe shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent melt-through.

Figure 25Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Pipe)


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

General Note: Pipe shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent melt-through.

Figure 26Procedure QualificationFillet Weld Soundness Test (Pipe to Plate)

44
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(3) The face of the weld shall be at least flush with (2) Groove weld qualification test for plate of limited
the outside surface of the pipe and the weld shall merge thickness (see Figures 29 and 30).
smoothly with the base metal. Undercut shall not exceed
(3) Fillet weld qualification test for fillet welds
1/32 in. [1 mm]. Weld reinforcement shall not exceed the
onlyOption 1 (see Figure 31), or Option 2 (see Figure
following:
32)Manufacturers option.

Pipe Wall Thickness Reinforcement, Max 7.17.2 The pipe or tubing qualification tests for weld-
3/8 [10 mm] and less 3/32 [2.5 mm] ers performing manual and semiautomatic operations
Over 3/8 [10 mm] to 1/8 [3 mm] shall be as follows:
3/4 [20 mm] incl. (1) Groove-weld qualification test for butt joints on
Over 3/4 [20 mm] 3/16 [5 mm] pipe or square or rectangular tubing (see Figures 33 and
34).
(4) The root of the weld shall be inspected and there
(2) Groove weld qualification test for T-, Y-, or K-
shall be no evidence of cracks, incomplete fusion or
connections on pipe or square or rectangular tubing (see
incomplete joint penetration. A concave root surface is
Figure 35).
permitted within the limits in 7.13.5.2 (5), provided the
total weld thickness is equal to or greater than that of the (3) Groove weld qualification test for butt joints on
base metal. square or rectangular tubing tested on flat plate (see Fig-
(5) The maximum root surface concavity shall be ure 36).
1/16 in. [2 mm] and the maximum melt-through shall be
1/8 in. [3 mm]. 7.17.3 The welder making a complete joint penetra-
tion plate groove weld procedure qualification test meet-
7.14 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by
ing the requirements is thereby qualified for that process
the Manufacturer and shall be available to those autho-
and test position for plates and square or rectangular tub-
rized to examine them.
ing of thicknesses equal to or less than the thickness of
7.15 Retests. If any one test specimen fails to meet the the test plate welded, unless it is 1 in. [25 mm] or more in
test requirements when all the other test specimens meet thickness, in which case the welder will be qualified for
the test requirements, two retests for that particular type all thicknesses.
of test specimen may be performed with specimens cut
from the same procedure qualification test material. The 7.17.4 The welder making a complete joint penetra-
results of both retest specimens shall meet the test tion groove weld pipe procedure qualification test with-
requirements. For material over 1-1/2 in. [40 mm] in out backing strip meeting the requirements is thereby
thickness, failure of a specimen shall require testing of qualified for that process and test position for piping hav-
all specimens of the same type from two additional loca- ing a wall thickness equal to or less than the wall thick-
tions in the test material. ness of the test pipe welded, unless it is 3/4 in. [20 mm]
or more in thickness, in which case the welder will be
qualified for all thicknesses.
Part CWelder Qualification 7.18 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a
welder, the following rules shall apply:
7.16 General. The qualification tests described herein
are specially devised tests to determine the welders abil- 7.18.1 A welder shall be qualified for each group of
ity to produce sound welds. It is not intended that the base metals shown in AWS B2.1, Standard for Welding
qualification tests shall be used as a guide for welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, that is to be
during actual production. The latter shall be performed in used and for each process to be used.
conformance to the requirements of the welding proce-
dure specification. 7.18.2 A welder qualified for manual shielded metal
arc welding of carbon and low-alloy steel with an
7.17 Qualification Tests Required
electrode identified within one of the following groups
7.17.1 The qualification tests for welders performing shall be considered qualified to weld or tack weld with
manual and semiautomatic operations shall be as follows: any other electrode in the same group designation and
(1) Groove weld qualification test for plate of unlim- with any electrode listed in a numerically lesser group
ited thickness (see Figures 27 and 28). designation:

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

45
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes:
(a) When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test area.
(b) The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] maximum. Backing
width shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed for radiography, otherwise it shall be
1 in. [25 mm].

Figure 27Welder QualificationTest Plate for Unlimited Thickness

Group Designation AWS Electrode Classification* 7.18.6 When the pipe or tubing is in the 5G or 6G
position, a change in the direction of welding, from bot-
F4 EXX15, EXX16, EXX18 tom to top or top to bottom, shall require requalification.
F3 EXX10, EXX11
7.19 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate
F2 EXX12, EXX13, EXX14
of Unlimited Thickness. Joint detail as follows: 1 in.
F1 EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28 [25 mm], single-V-groove, 45 included angle, 1/4 in.
*The letters XX used in the classification designation above [6 mm] root opening with backing (see Figure 27). For
indicates the various electrode strength levels. horizontal position qualification, the joint detail may be
(Manufacturers option) as follows: single-bevel-groove,
7.18.3 A welder qualified with an approved electrode 45 groove angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm] root opening with back-
and shielding medium combination shall be considered ing (see Figure 28). Backing shall be at least 3/8 in.
qualified to weld or tack weld with any other approved [10 mm] thick 3 in. [75 mm] wide length of weld if
electrode and shielding medium combination for the pro- radiography is used for testing without removal of back-
cess used in the qualification test. ing. It shall be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick 1 in.
[25 mm] wide length of weld for mechanical testing
7.18.4 A change in the position of welding, other than after the backing is removed. Minimum length of weld-
those changes previously qualified, shall require requali- ing groove shall be 5 in. [125 mm].
fication (see Table 15).
7.20 Groove Weld Plate Qualification Test for Plate
7.18.5 A change from one diameter wall pipe of Limited Thickness. Joint detail as follows: 3/8 in.
grouping to another, shown in Table 16, shall require [10 mm] plate, single-V-groove, 45 included angle,
requalification. 1/4 in. [6 mm] root opening with backing (see Figure

46
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes:
(a) When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test
area.
(b) The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm]
maximum. Backing width shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed for
radiography, otherwise it shall be 1 in. [25 mm].

Figure 28Welder QualificationOptional Test Plate for


Unlimited ThicknessHorizontal Position

29). For horizontal position qualification, the joint detail opening without backing strip (see Figure 31), or single-
may be (Manufacturers option) as follows: single-bevel- V-groove, 60 included angle and suitable root opening
groove, 45 groove angle, 1/4 in. [6 mm] root opening with backing (see Figure 32).
with backing (see Figure 30). Backing shall be at least
3/8 in. [10 mm] thick 3 in. [75 mm] wide length of 7.22 Groove Weld Qualification Test for T-, Y-, or K-
weld if radiography is used for testing without removal Connections on Pipe or Square or Rectangular
of backing. It shall be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick 1 Tubing. The joint detail shall be as follows: single bevel,
in. [25 mm] wide length of weld for mechanical test- 37.5 included angle with bevel on pipe or tube at least
ing or, if radiography is used, for testing after the back- 1/2 in. [13 mm] in thickness; the square edge pipe or tube
ing is removed. Minimum length of welding groove shall shall be at least 3/16 in. [5 mm] thicker than the beveled
be 5 in. [125 mm]. pipe thickness; 1/16 in. [2 mm] maximum root face and
1/8 in. [3 mm] root opening. A restriction ring shall be
7.21 Groove Weld Qualification Test for Butt Joints placed on the thicker material within 1/2 in. [13 mm] of
on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing. The joint the joint and shall extend at least 6 in. [150 mm] beyond
detail shall be in conformance to a qualified welding pro- the surface of the pipe or tube (see Figures 33 and 34).
cedure specification for a single-welded pipe butt weld 7.23 Fillet Weld Qualification Test
or shall be as follows: pipe diameter and wall thickness
as required, single-V-groove, 60 included angle, 1/8 in. 7.23.1 Option 1Test Plate. The T-test shall be in
[3 mm] maximum root face and 1/8 in. [3 mm] root conformance to Figure 31.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

47
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes:
(a) When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test area.
(b) The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] maximum. Backing
width shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed for radiography, otherwise it shall be
1 in. [25 mm].

Figure 29Welder QualificationTest Plate for Limited ThicknessFlat Position

7.23.2 Option 2Test Plate. The soundness test 7.24.2 Groove Weld Test for Pipe
shall be in conformance to Figure 32.
7.24.2.1 Qualification in the 1G (pipe horizontal
7.24 Positions of Test Welds (see Table 15) rolled) position qualifies for flat position groove welding
of pipe, tubing, and plate, flat position fillet welding of
7.24.1 Groove Plate Test Welds
pipe and tubing, and flat and horizontal position fillet
7.24.1.1 Qualification in the 1G (flat) position welding of plate.
qualifies for flat position groove welding of plate, pipe,
and tubing, flat and horizontal position fillet welding of 7.24.2.2 Qualification in the 2G (pipe vertical)
plate, and flat position fillet welding of pipe and tubing. position qualifies for flat and horizontal position groove
and flat and horizontal position fillet welding of pipe,
7.24.1.2 Qualification in the 2G (horizontal) posi- tubing, and plate.
tion qualifies for flat and horizontal position groove and
flat and horizontal position fillet welding of plate, pipe, 7.24.2.3 Qualification in the 5G (pipe horizontal
and tubing. fixed) position qualifies for flat, vertical, and overhead
position fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.1.3 Qualification in the 3G (vertical) position
qualifies for flat, horizontal, and vertical position groove 7.24.2.4 Qualification in the 6G (inclined fixed)
and flat, horizontal and vertical position fillet welding of position qualifies for all position groove and all position
plate. fillet welding of pipe, tubing, and plate.
7.24.1.4 Qualification in the 4G (overhead) posi- 7.24.2.5 Qualification for T-, Y-, or K-connections
tion qualifies for flat and overhead position groove and in the 6G (inclined fixed) position qualifies for groove
flat, horizontal, and overhead position fillet welding of welding T-, Y-, and K-connections, and groove and fillet
plate. welding in all positions of pipe, tubing, and plate.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

48
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes:
(a) When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test
area.
(b) The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm]
maximum. Backing width shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed for
radiography, otherwise it shall be 1 in. [25 mm].

Figure 30Welder QualificationOptional Test Plate


for Limited ThicknessHorizontal Position

7.24.3 Fillet Weld TestWelder Qualification fied. If no backing is used for the groove plate test, this
shall also qualify for groove welding pipe with or with-
7.24.3.1 Qualification in the 1F (flat) position out backing in the same position qualified.
qualifies for flat position fillet welding of plate, pipe, and
tubing. 7.25 Base Metal. The base metal used shall comply with
the welding procedure specification.
7.24.3.2 Qualification in the 2F (horizontal) posi-
tion qualifies for flat and horizontal position fillet weld- 7.26 Welding Procedure. The welder shall follow a
ing of plate, pipe, and tubing. welding procedure specification.

7.24.3.3 Qualification in the 3F (vertical) position 7.27 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation
qualifies for flat, horizontal, and vertical position fillet 7.27.1 The type and number of test specimens that
welding of plate. shall be tested to qualify a welder by mechanical testing
7.24.3.4 Qualification in the 4F (overhead) posi- are shown in Table 16, together with a range of thickness
tion qualifies for flat, horizontal, and overhead position that is qualified for use in construction by the thickness
fillet welding of plate. of the test plate, pipe, or tubing used in making the quali-
fication. Radiographic testing of the test weld, except for
7.24.4 Qualification for groove plate tests in 1G (flat) fillet welds and GMAW-S (gas metal arc welding in the
or 2G (horizontal) positions shall also qualify for butt short circuiting mode), may be used at the Manufac-
welding pipe with a backing in the same position quali- turers option in lieu of mechanical testing.

49
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
General Notes:
(a) Plate thickness and dimensions are minimums.
(b) Either end of the test weldment may be used for the required macroetch specimen. The other end may be
discarded.

Figure 31Welder QualificationFillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test PlateOption 1

7.27.2 Guided-bend test specimens shall be prepared 7.28 Method of Testing Specimens
by cutting the test plate, pipe, or tubing as shown in Fig-
7.28.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Specimens.
ures 27, 28, 29, 30, 36, or 37, whichever are applicable,
Each specimen shall be bent in a jig having the contour
to form specimens approximately rectangular in cross
shown in Figures A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0-98 or
section. The test specimens shall be prepared for testing
AWS B4.0M:2000, Standard Methods for Mechanical
on accordance with Figures A5 through A8, A11, A12,
Testing of Welds, in accordance with those illustrations.
A14, and A15 in AWS B4.0-98 or AWS B4.0M:2000,
Any convenient means may be used to move the plunger
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds, as
member with relation to the die member.
applicable.
The specimen shall be placed on the die member of
7.27.3 The fillet weld break and macroetch test speci- the jig with the weld at midspan. Face-bend specimens
mens shall be cut from the test joint as shown in Figure shall be oriented with the face of the weld in tension.
35. The end of the macroetch specimen shall be smooth Root-bend and fillet weld soundness specimens shall be
for etching. oriented with the root of the weld in tension. Side-bend
specimens shall be oriented with the side showing the
7.27.4 If radiography is used in lieu of the prescribed greater defects, if any, in tension.
bend tests, the weld reinforcement need not be ground or The plunger shall force the specimen into the die until
otherwise smoothed for inspection, unless its surface the specimen becomes U-shaped. The weld and heat-
irregularities or juncture with the base metal would cause affected zones shall be centered and completely within
objectionable weld defects to be obscured in the radio- the bent portion of the specimen after testing.
graph. If the backing is removed for radiography, the When using the wraparound jig, the specimen shall be
root shall be ground flush with the base metal. clamped on one end so that the specimen cannot slide

50
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 32Welder QualificationFillet Weld Root-Bend Test PlateOption 2

51
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 33Welder QualificationPlate Figure 34Welder Qualification


and Pipe Butt Joint Without Backing Pipe Butt Joint With Backing

Figure 35Welder QualificationTest Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections


on Pipe or Square or Rectangular Tubing

52
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 36Welder QualificationOptional Test Joint for


T-, Y-, and K-Connections on Square or Rectangular Tubing

during the bending operation. The weld and heat- examined for surface discontinuities. For acceptance, the
affected zones shall be completely within the bent por- surface shall contain no discontinuities exceeding the
tion of the specimen after testing. Test specimens shall following criteria:
be removed from the jig when the outer roll has been (1) 1/8 in. [3 mm] measured in any direction on the
moved 180 from the starting point. surface;
(2) 3/8 in. [10 mm]the sum of the greatest dimen-
7.28.2 Fillet Weld Break Test. The entire length of
sions of all discontinuities exceeding 1/32 in. [1 mm],
the fillet weld shall be examined visually and then the
but less than or equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm];
6 in. [150 mm] long specimen shall be loaded in such a
(3) 1/4 in. [6 mm]the maximum corner crack,
way that the root of the weld shall be in tension. The load
except when that corner crack resulted from visible slag
shall be steadily increased or repeated until the specimen
inclusion or other fusion type discontinuities, then the
fractures or bends flat upon itself.
1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum shall apply.
7.28.3 Macroetch Test. Etching shall be made by Specimens with corner cracks exceeding 1/4 in.
using a suitable solution to give a clear definition of the [6 mm] with no evidence of slag inclusions or other
weld. fusion-type discontinuities shall be disregarded and a
replacement test specimen from the original weldment
7.28.4 Radiographic Test. The radiographic proce- shall be tested.
dure and technique shall be in conformance to the
requirements of 8.2. Only the center half of the length of 7.29.2 Fillet Weld Break Test
the test plate or 50% of the test pipe shall be subject to 7.29.2.1 To pass the visual examination, the fillet
testing. weld shall present a reasonably uniform appearance and
7.29 Test Results Required shall be free of overlap, cracks, and excessive undercut.
There shall be no porosity visible on the surface of the
7.29.1 Root-, Face-, and Side-Bend Tests. The con- weld. Fillet weld size and tolerance shall meet the crite-
vex surface of the bend test specimen shall be visually ria stated in 8.1.7.2 and 8.1.8.2.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

53
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 15
Welder and Welding Operator QualificationType and Position(1) Limitations
Weld Type and Welding Position Qualified

Qualification Test Plate Pipe

Plate or Pipe
Type of Test Weld Test Position(2) Groove Fillet Groove Fillet

Plate-groove 1G F F, H F, H
2G F, H F, H F, H
3G F, H, V F, H, V F(3) F, H
4G F, OH F, H, OH F, H(3) F
3G and 4G All All F, H, V(3) F, H

Plate-fillet(4) 1F F F
2F F, H F, H
3F F, H, V
4F F, H, OH
3F and 4F All
Pipe-groove 1G Rotated F F, H F F, H
2G F, H F, H F, H F, H
5G F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH F, V, OH
6G See Note (4) See Note (4) See Note (4) See Note (4)
2G and 5G See Note (4) See Note (4) See Note (4) See Note (4)
6GR (Figure 18D) All All All All
6GR (Figure 18E) All T-, Y-, K-Box Only All

Pipe-fillet 1F Rotated F F
2F F, H F, H
2F Rotated F, H F, H
4F F, H, OH F, H, OH
5F All All
Notes:
(1) Positions of welding: F= flat, H = horizontal, V = vertical, OH = overhead.
(2) See Figures 15, 16, 17, and 18.
(3) Welder qualified to weld tubulars over 24 in. [600 mm] in diameter with backing or backgouging, for the test positions indicated.
(4) Qualified for all but groove welds for T-, Y-, and K-connections.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
7.29.2.2 The specimen shall pass the test if it bends erance shall meet the criteria stated in 8.1.7.2 and
flat upon itself. If the fillet weld fractures, the fractured 8.1.8.2.
surface shall show complete penetration into the root
7.29.4 Radiographic Test. For acceptable qualifica-
of the joint and shall exhibit no incomplete fusion to tion, the weld, as revealed by the radiograph, shall con-
the base metal nor any inclusion or porosity larger than form to the requirements of 8.2.4.6.
3/32 in. [2.5 mm] in its greatest dimension. The sum of
the greatest dimensions of all inclusions and porosity 7.29.5 Visual Examination. For acceptable qualifica-
shall not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm] in the 6 in. [150 mm] tion, the pipe weld when examined visually shall con-
form to the following requirements:
long specimen.
7.29.5.1 The weld shall be free of cracks.
7.29.3 Macroetch Test. The fillet weld shall show
fusion at the root of the joint, but not necessarily beyond 7.29.5.2 All craters shall be filled to the full cross
section of the weld.
the root. The weld metal and heat-affected zone shall be
free of cracks. Concavity or convexity of the weld face 7.29.5.3 The face of the weld shall be at least flush
shall not exceed 1/16 in. [2 mm]. Fillet weld size and tol- with the outside surface of the pipe and the weld shall

54
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 16
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification
Number and Type of Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified
1. Tests on Plate

Number of Specimens
Thickness of
Test Plate (T) Bend Tests(1) Plate Thickness
as Welded Visual T-Joint Macroetch Qualified
Type of Weld in. [mm] Inspection Face Root Side Break Test in. [mm]

Groove(2) 3/8 [10] Yes 1 1 3/4 [20] max(3)


Groove > 3/8 [10] to Yes 2 2T max(3), (4)
< 1 [25]
Groove 1 [25] Yes 2 (5)Unlimited(3)

Fillet Option No. 1 (5) 1/2 [13] Yes 1 1 Unlimited


Fillet Option No. 2 (6) 3/8 [10] Yes 2 Unlimited
Plug 3/8 [10] Yes 2 Unlimited

2. Tests on Pipe or Tubing

Number of Bend Test Specimens(1)


Plate, Pipe, or Tube
All Positions Except 5G, 6G, and 6GR Wall Thickness
Nominal 5G, 6G, and 6GR Positions Only Pipe or Qualified
Type Thick- Tube Size
of Diameter ness Visual Face Root Side Face Root Side Qualified Min. Max.
Weld in. [mm] in. [mm] Inspection Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend Bend in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm]

2 [50] @ 0.218 [5.5]


Schedule or
80 or 40 0.154 [4] 4 [100]
Groove Yes 1 1 2 2 0.125 [3] 0.674 [17]
3 [75] @ 0.300 [7.5] or smaller
Schedule or
80 or 40 0.216 [5.5]
T-, Y-, and K-
Groove See Figure 35 Yes connections, Unlimited
4 [100]
Job Size Pipe or Tubing
Type of Diameter Wall
Weld in. [mm] Thickness
Groove 4 [100] Any Yes 1 1 2 2 3/4 [20] 0.125 [3] 0.674 [17]
through
4 [100]
Groove > 4 [100] Any Yes 2 4 1/2 test 0.187 [5] Unlimited
diam.
Notes:
(1) Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test plate may be made in lieu of the bend test.
(2) Not applicable for welding operator qualification.
(3) Also qualifies for welding fillet welds on material of unlimited thickness.
(4) T max for welding operator qualification.
(5) See Figure 31.
(6) See Figure 32.

(Continued)

55 --`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 16 (Continued)
Welder and Welding Operator Qualification
Number and Type of Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified
2. Tests on Pipe or Tubing (Continued)

Nominal
Diameter Wall Thickness
@ Thickness Visual Fillet Macroetch Pipe or Tube Qualified
Type of Weld in. [mm] Inspection Weld Break Test Size Qualified in. [mm]

T-,Y-, and K-
Groove See Figure 36 Yes 4 Unlimited(7)
box connections
2 [50] @ Sch. 80
(0.214 [5.5])
or any except
Fillet 2 [50] @Sch. 40 Yes 1(8) 1 T-,Y-, and K- Unlimited
(0.154 [4]) connections
or
Job Size Pipe

3. Tests on Electroslag and Electrogas

Test Specimens Required

Plate Thickness
Plate Thickness Tested Number of Side Bend(9) Qualified
in. [mm] Sample Welds Visual Inspection (See 7.11.1.3) in. [mm]

1-1/2 [40] max 1 Yes 2 Unlimited for 1-1/2 [40]


Max tested for <1-1/2 [40]
Notes:
(7) Also qualifies for welding fillet welds on material of unlimited thickness.
(8) The quarter-section for the joint-break test may be further sectioned to facilitate the testing and make the break possible, provided that at least on
welding start and stop are tested.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(9) Radiographic examination of the welder or welding operator test pipe may be made in lieu of the bend test.

merge smoothly with the base metal. Undercut shall not 7.29.5.5 The maximum root surface concavity
exceed 1/32 in. [1 mm]. Weld reinforcement shall not shall be 1/16 in. [2 mm] and the maximum melt-through
exceed the following: shall be 1/8 in. [3 mm].

Pipe Wall Thickness Reinforcement, Max


7.30 Retests. In case a welder fails to meet the require-
3/8 [10 mm] and less 3/32 [2.5 mm] ments of one or more test welds, a retest may be allowed
Over 3/8 [10 mm] to 1/8 [3 mm] under the following conditions:
3/4 [20 mm] incl.
Over 3/4 [20 mm] 3/16 [5 mm]
7.30.1 An immediate retest may be made consisting
of two test welds of each type failed; all test specimens
7.29.5.4 The root of the weld shall be inspected shall meet all the requirements specified for such welds.
and there shall be no evidence of cracks, incomplete
fusion, or incomplete joint penetration. A concave root
surface is permitted within the limits shown in 7.29.5.5 7.30.2 A retest may be made provided there is evi-
provided the total weld thickness is equal to or greater dence that the welder has had further training or practice.
than that of the base metal. In this case a complete retest shall be made.

56
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 37Welder QualificationLocation of Test Specimens


for Welded Test Pipe and Square or Rectangular Tubing

7.31 Period of Effectiveness. The welders qualification Part DWelding Operator


specified herein shall be considered in effect indefinitely
unless (1) the welder is not engaged in a given process of
Qualification
welding for which he is qualified for a period exceeding
six months or (2) there is a specific reason to question a
7.33 General. The qualification tests described herein
welders ability. In case (1), the requalification test need
are specially devised to determine the welding operators
be made only in the 3/8 in. [10 mm] thickness.
ability to produce sound welds. It is not intended that the
qualification tests shall be used as a guide for welding
7.32 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by during actual construction. The latter shall be performed
the Manufacturer and shall be available to those autho- in conformance to the requirements of a welding proce-
rized to examine them. dure specification.

57
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

7.34 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a with backing. Backing shall be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm]
welding operator, the following rules shall apply: thick 3 in. [75 mm] wide length of weld if radiogra-
phy is used for testing without removal of backing. It
7.34.1 A welding operator shall be separately quali- shall be at least 3/8 in. [10 mm] thick 1-1/2 in. [40 mm]
fied for each group of base metals shown in AWS B2.1 wide length of weld for mechanical testing or if radiog-
that is to be used, and for each process to be used. raphy is used for testing after the backing is removed.
7.34.2 For other than electroslag (ESW) or electrogas Minimum length of welding groove shall be 15 in.
welding (EGW), a welding operator qualified to weld [380 mm] (see Figure 38). This test will qualify the
with multiple electrodes shall be qualified to weld with a welding operator for groove and fillet welding in mate-
single electrode, but not vice versa. rials of unlimited thickness.

7.34.3 An ESW or EGW operator qualified with an 7.35.2 The qualification test for an electroslag or elec-
approved electrode and shielding medium combination trogas welding operator shall consist of welding a joint
shall be considered qualified to weld with any other of the maximum thickness of material to be used in con-
approved electrode and shielding medium combination struction; however, the thickness of the material of the
for the process used in the qualification test. test weld need not exceed 1-1/2 in. [40 mm] (see Figure
39). If a test weld is made in the 1-1/2 in. [40 mm] thick-
7.34.4 A change in the position in which welding is ness, no test need be made for lesser thicknesses. This
done, as defined in 7.9, shall require requalification. test shall qualify the welding operator for groove and
7.35 Qualification Tests Required fillet welds in material of unlimited thickness.

7.35.1 The qualification test for a welding operator 7.35.3 The welding operator making a complete joint
for other than electroslag or electrogas shall have a joint penetration procedure qualification test meeting the
detail as follows: 1 in. [25 mm] plate, single-V-groove, requirements is thereby qualified for that process and test
20 included groove angle, 5/8 in. [16 mm] root opening position for plate of thicknesses equal to or less than the

General Notes:
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(a) When radiography is used for testing, no tack welds shall be in the test area.
(b) The joint configuration of a qualified groove weld procedure may be used in lieu of the
groove configuration shown here.
(c) The backing thickness shall be 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm] maximum. Backing width
shall be 3 in. [75 mm] when not removed for radiography, otherwise it shall be 1 in. [25 mm].

Figure 38Welding Operator QualificationTest Plate for Unlimited Thickness

58
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
General Notes:
(a) Root opening (R) is established by the welding procedure specification
(WPS).
(b) T = maximum to be welded in construction but need not exceed 1-1/2 in.
[40 mm].
Note:
(1) Extensions do not need to be used if joint is of sufficient length to provide
17 in. [430 mm] of sound weld.

Figure 39Welding Operator QualificationElectroslag and Electrogas Welded Butt Joint

thickness of the test plate. If the test plate is 1-1/2 in. 7.38 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Preparation
[40 mm] or over in thickness for ESW or EGW or 1 in.
7.38.1 For mechanical testing, two side-bend speci-
[25 mm] or over for all other processes, the welding
mens shall be cut from the test joint approximately 4 in.
operator will be qualified for all thicknesses.
[100 mm] apart, or 8 in. [200 mm] apart for electroslag
7.36 Base Metal. The base metal shall be carbon or low- and electrogas welds, at the middle of the length of the
alloy steel as shown in AWS B2.1, Specification for weld prepared for testing in accordance with Figure 39.
Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification, or a
7.38.2 Radiographic testing of the test joint may be
welding procedure specification.
made at the Manufacturers option in lieu of the guided
7.37 Welding Procedure. The welding operator shall bend test. If radiography is used in lieu of the prescribed
follow a welding procedure specification. bend tests, the weld reinforcement need not be ground or

59
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

otherwise smoothed for inspection unless its surface Part EQualification of Tack Welders
irregularities or juncture with the base metal would cause
objectionable weld defects to be obscured in the radio-
graph. If the backing is removed for radiography, the 7.43 General. The qualification tests described herein
root shall be ground flush with the base metal. are specially devised tests to determine the tack welders
ability to produce sound welds. It is not intended that
7.38.3 Method of Testing Specimens the qualification tests be used as a guide for welding
7.38.3.1 Side Bend Specimens. Each specimen during actual construction. The latter shall be performed
shall be bent in a jig having the contour shown in Figures in conformance to the requirements of the procedure
A1 through A3 from AWS B4.0-98 or AWS B4.0M:2000, specification.
Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds, in 7.44 Limitation of Variables. For the qualification of a
accordance with those illustrations. Any convenient tack welder, these rules shall apply:
means may be used to move the plunger member (if
used) with relation to the die member. The specimen 7.44.1 Qualification established with any one of the
shall be placed on the die member of the jig with the base metals of Table 6 shall be considered as qualifica-
weld at midspan. Specimens shall be oriented with the tion to tack weld any of the other base metals.
side showing the greater defects, if any, in tension.
7.44.2 A tack welder qualified for manual shielded
7.38.3.2 Radiographic Test. The radiographic metal arc welding with an electrode identified within one
procedure and technique shall be in conformance to the of the following groups shall be considered qualified to
requirements of 8.2. tack weld with any other electrode in the same group
designation and with any electrode listed in a numeri-
7.39 Test Results Required
cally lesser group designation:
7.39.1 Side-Bend Tests. The convex surface of the
specimen shall be examined for the appearance of cracks Group Designation AWS Electrode Classification*
or other open defects. Any specimen in which a crack or
F4 EXX15, EXX16, EXX18
other open defect exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm], measured in
any direction, is present after the bending shall be con- F3 EXX10, EXX11
sidered as having failed. Cracks occurring on the corners F2 EXX12, EXX13, EXX14
of the specimen during testing shall not be considered. F1 EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28
7.39.2 For acceptable qualification, the weld, as *The letters XX used in the classification designations repre-
revealed by the radiograph, shall conform to the require- sent the various electrode strength levels.
ments of 8.2.4.6.
7.40 Retests. In case a welding operator fails to meet the 7.44.3 A tack welder qualified with an approved elec-
requirements of one or more test welds, a retest may be trode and shielding medium combination shall be consid-
allowed under the following conditions:
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

ered qualified to tack weld with any other approved


7.40.1 An immediate retest may be made consisting electrode and shielding medium combination for the pro-
of two test welds of each type failed, all of which shall cess used in the qualification test.
meet all the requirements specified for such welds. 7.44.4 A tack welder shall be qualified for each process
7.40.2 A retest may be made, provided there is evi- used.
dence that the welding operator has had further training 7.44.5 A change in the position in which tacking is
or practice. In this case a complete retest shall be made. done, as defined in 7.9, shall require requalification.
7.41 Period of Effectiveness. The welding operators 7.45 Qualification Tests Required. A tack welder shall
qualification specified herein shall be considered in be qualified by one test made in each position in which
effect indefinitely unless (1) the welding operator is not the tack welding is to be performed.
engaged in the given process of welding for which the
welding operator is qualified for a period exceeding six 7.46 Base Metal. The base metal used shall be carbon or
months, or (2) there is a specific reason to question the low-alloy steel or shall comply with the welding proce-
welding operators ability. dure specification.
7.42 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by 7.47 Test SpecimensNumber, Type, and Prepara-
the Manufacturer and shall be available to those autho- tion. The tack welder shall make a 1/4 in. [6 mm] maxi-
rized to examine them. mum size tack weld approximately 2 in. [50 mm] long on

60
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

the fillet weld break specimen as shown in Figure 40 7.49.2 The fractured surface of the tack weld shall
using a 5/32 in. [4 mm] diameter electrode. show complete penetration into the root of the joint and
shall exhibit no incomplete fusion to the base metal nor
7.48 Method of Testing Specimens. A force shall be any inclusion or porosity larger than 3/32 in. [2.5 mm] in
applied to the specimen as shown in Figure 41 until rup- the greatest dimension.
ture occurs. The force may be applied by any convenient
means. The surfaces of the weld and of the fracture shall 7.49.3 A tack welder who passes the fillet weld break
be examined visually for external defects. test shall be eligible to tack weld all types of joints for
7.49 Test Results Required the process and in the position for which the tack welder
has been qualified.
7.49.1 The tack weld shall present a reasonably uni-
form appearance and shall be free of overlap, cracks, and 7.50 Retests. In case of failure to pass the fillet weld
excessive undercut. There shall be no porosity visible on break test, the tack welder may make one retest without
the surface of the tack weld. additional training.

Figure 40Tack Welder QualificationFillet Weld Break Specimen


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 41Tack Welder QualificationMethod of


Rupturing Fillet Weld Break Specimen

61
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

7.51 Period of Effectiveness. A tack welder who passes 8.1.3.2 All weldments containing Joint Class I
the fillet weld break test shall be considered eligible to through VI welds shall be visually inspected in their
perform tack welding indefinitely in the positions and entirety for dimensional defects given in 8.1.4(2).
with the processes for which the tack welder is qualified
unless there is a specific reason to question that ability. 8.1.3.3 Visual examination for cracks in welds and
In such case, the tack welder shall be required to again base metal and other defects should be aided by a strong
light, magnifiers, or other such devices that may be

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
demonstrate ability to make sound tack welds by passing
the prescribed tack welding test. helpful.
8.1.4 Visual Weld Discontinuities and Dimensional
7.52 Records. Records of the test results shall be kept by
Defects. Weld discontinuities and dimensional defects
the Manufacturer and shall be available to those autho-
are identified as follows:
rized to examine them.
(1) Discontinuities in Welds
(a) Cracks,
(b) Undercut,
8. Inspection
(c) Incomplete joint penetration,
Inspectors responsible for acceptance or rejection of (d) Incomplete fusion,
material and workmanship shall be qualified, and the (e) Surface porosity, and
basis of inspector qualification shall be documented. If (f) Weld bead irregularities and profiles.
the Engineer elects to specify the basis of inspector qual-
ification, it shall be so stated in contract documents. (2) Dimensional Defects
For welds subject to nondestructive testing in accor- (a) Incorrect joint geometry,
dance to this section, the final acceptance may begin (b) Incorrect weld size, and
immediately after the completed welds have cooled to (c) Incorrect final dimensions.
ambient temperature. Acceptance for ASTM A 514,
A 517, and A 709 Grade 100 and 100W steels shall be 8.1.5 Definition of Weld Discontinuities
based on nondestructive testing performed not less than
8.1.5.1 Crack. A crack is a fracture-type disconti-
48 hours after completion of the welds.
nuity characterized by a sharp tip and high ratio of length
8.1 Visual Inspection and width to opening displacement. (See AWS A3.0,
Standard Welding Terms and Definitions.)
8.1.1 General. The procedures and standards set forth (1) Figure 42 illustrates the various types of weld-
in this section are to govern visual examination of all related cracking most of which can be detected by visual
classes of welds. examination.
(2) Weld metal cracks include longitudinal cracks,
8.1.2 Personnel qualification shall be according to the
transverse cracks, and crater cracks.
following:
(3) Base-metal cracks include toe cracks adjacent to
(1) Current or previous certification as an AWS Cer- weld edges and transverse cracks extending from the
tified Welding Inspector (CWI) in conformance to the weld metal into the base metal. Subsurface (underbead)
provisions of AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Quali- cracks are not detectable by visual inspection.
fication and Certification of Welding Inspectors;
(2) Current or previous qualification by the Canadian 8.1.5.2 Undercut is a groove melted into the base
Welding Bureau (CWB) to the requirements of the Cana- metal adjacent to the weld toe or weld root and left
dian Standard Association (CSA) Standard W178.2, Cer- unfilled by weld metal as illustrated in Figure 43.
tification of Welding Inspectors; or
8.1.5.3 Incomplete joint penetration is a joint root
(3) An engineer or technician who, by training or condition in a groove weld in which weld metal does not
experience, or both, in metals fabrication, inspection and extend through the joint thickness.
testing, is competent to perform inspection of the work.
8.1.5.4 Incomplete fusion is a weld discontinuity in
8.1.3 Extent of Inspection Required which fusion did not occur between weld metal and
fusion faces or adjoining weld beads.
8.1.3.1 All welds conforming to Joint Class I
through VI of this specification shall be visually 8.1.5.5 Surface porosity is cavity-type discontinui-
inspected in their entirety for discontinuities given in ties formed by gas entrapment during solidification that
8.1.4(1) and listed in Table 17. are open to the surface.

62
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 17
Acceptance Criteria for Visual Inspection
Extent of Visual Weld Defects Allowed

Incomplete Joint Surface Porosity Weld Bead


Class of Penetration (Underfill), Including Piping Irregularities and
Weld Quality Cracks Undercut Incomplete Fusion Porosity(1) Profiles

Class 1 None Visually free from Visually free from all The frequency of See 8.1.5.6
undercut in the evidence of inadequate porosity shall not
direction transverse to joint penetration or exceed one in 4 in.
primary stress. 0.01 in. other types of fusion [100 mm] of weld
[0.25 mm] maximum defects. length, and the
depth smoothly maximum diameter
contoured undercut shall not exceed 1/32 in.
parallel to direction of [1 mm].
primary stress.
Class II None 0.01 in. [0.25 mm] Visually free from all The frequency of Rough, irregular
maximum depth for evidence of inadequate porosity shall not welds and excess
smoothly contoured joint penetration or exceed one in 4 in. reinforcement to be
undercut parallel to other types of fusion [100 mm] of weld ground smooth.
direction of primary defects. length, and the (See Figure 43)
stress. 1/32 in. [1 mm] maximum diameter
maximum depth for shall not exceed 1/32 in.
undercut parallel to [1 mm].
direction of primary
stress.
Class III None 1/32 in. [1 mm] 1/3T or 1/2 in. [13 mm] The sum of diameters Rough, irregular
maximum depth for maximum length 1/16 in. [2 mm] or welds and excess
undercut transverse incomplete penetration. greater shall not exceed reinforcement to be
and parallel to Sum of all defects not to 1/4 in. [6 mm] in any ground smooth.
direction of primary exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in linear inch of weld, or (See Figure 43)
stress. 12 in. [300 mm]. 1/2 in. [13 mm] in

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
12 in. [300 mm] length.

Class IV None 1/32 in. [1 mm] 2/3 T or 3/4 in. [20 mm] The sum of diameters (See Figure 43)
maximum depth for maximum length 3/32 in. [2.5 mm] or
undercut transverse incomplete penetration. greater shall not exceed
and parallel to Sum of all defects not to 3/8 in. [10 mm] in any
direction of primary exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in linear inch of weld, or
stress. 6 in. [150 mm]. 1/2 in. [13 mm] in
12 in. [300 mm] length.

Class V None 1/32 in. [1 mm] 1 T or 1 in. [25 mm] Not Applicable (See Figure 43)
maximum depth for maximum length
undercut transverse to incomplete penetration.
direction of primary Sum of all defects not to
stress. exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in
6 in. [150 mm].

Class VI None 1/4 T or 1/16 in. 1 T or 1 in. [25 mm] Not Applicable (See Figure 43)
[2 mm] (whichever is maximum length
less) depth when the incomplete penetration.
direction is parallel to Sum of all defects not to
that of primary stress. exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in
6 in. [150 mm].
Note:
(1) Piping porosity is elongated porosity whose major dimension lies in a direction approximately normal to the weld surface. Frequently it is referred
to as pin holes when the porosity extends to the surface.

63
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 42Cracks in Welded Joints

8.1.5.6 Weld Bead Irregularities and Incorrect and 43B, with none of the unacceptable profiles shown
Profiles in Figure 43C.
(1) Weld bead irregularities and conditions of poor
(1) Except at outside welds in corner joints, the con-
appearance include variations in surface layer width,
vexity of a weld or individual surface bead shall not
nonuniformity of weld ripple, and excessive weld metal
exceed the values given in Figure 43.
spatter.
(2) Incorrect fillet weld profiles include conditions of (2) Except for undercut, as permitted by this specifi-
insufficient throat, excessive convexity, underfill, exces- cation, these profile requirements do not apply to the
sive undercut, overlap, and insufficient leg size as ends of intermittent fillet welds outside their effective
defined in Figure 43C. length.
(3) Incorrect groove weld profiles include conditions
of excessive convexity, excessive undercut, overlap, and
8.1.6.2 For Joint Class II through VI welded joints,
incomplete fusion, as defined in Figure 43E.
groove welds shall preferably be made with slight or
(4) Machining or grinding direction shall be perpen-
minimum face reinforcement except as may be otherwise
dicular to the length of Joint Class I welds.
provided. In the case of butt and corner joints, the face
8.1.6 Acceptance Criteria for Weld Discontinuities. reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm] in height
All welds conforming to Joint Class I through VI of this and shall have gradual transition to the plane of the base
specification shall meet the acceptance criteria listed metal surface (see Figure 43D.) The welds shall be free
herein and Table 17. of the discontinuities shown for butt joints in Figure 43E.
8.1.6.1 The faces of fillet welds may be slightly
convex, flat, or slightly concave as shown in Figures 43A 8.1.6.3 Welds shall be free from overlap.

64
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 43Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles

65
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

8.1.7 Definition of Dimensional Defects 8.1.8.3 Incorrect Final Dimensions. Acceptabil-


ity of specific dimensional conditions of the completed
8.1.7.1 Incorrect Joint Geometry
weldment depends upon appearance requirements and
(1) Incorrect joint geometry subject to visual inspec- the accuracies required for subsequent machining,
tion, generally before welding is started, includes out-of- assembly, installation, or end use of the product.
tolerance welding bevel or groove dimensions, base
metal misalignment, and undesirable weld joint fit-up 8.1.9 Defect Removal and Repair (see Section 9)
conditions.
(2) Included in the requirements for weld joint prepa- 8.2 Radiographic Inspection
ration shall be inspection for removal of scale, paint, oil,
8.2.1 General. The procedures and standards set forth
etc., from the weld joint a minimum of 1/2 in. [12 mm]
in this section are to govern radiographic inspection of
on each side of the weld joint.
welded joints when such inspection is required. The
(3) Partial penetration weld joint geometry shall be
methodology shall conform to ASTM E 94, Guide for
visually inspected prior to welding to assure proper weld
Radiographic Testing, ASTM E 747, Guide for Control-
throat dimension will be achieved.
ling Quality of Radiographic Testing Using Wire Penet-
8.1.7.2 Incorrect Weld Size rameters, and ASTM E 1032, Method for Radiographic
(1) Incorrect weld size subject to visual inspection Examination of Weldments.
includes undersized fillet weld leg dimensions and
8.2.2 Personnel qualifications and records shall be in
underfill groove weld throat dimension as defined in
accordance with ASNT SNT-TC-1A, Recommended
Figure 43.
Practice No. SNT-TC-1A.
(2) Fillet weld size shall be determined by means of a
fillet weld gage. 8.2.3 Extent of Inspection
8.1.7.3 Incorrect Final Dimensions. Incorrect 8.2.3.1 Information furnished to the bidder shall
final dimensions subject to visual inspection include all identify the extent of radiographic inspection to be per-
conditions of dimensional inaccuracies, distortion, and formed by identifying the joints to be radiographed and
lack of conformity to drawing requirements. by designating whether complete or spot radiographs
8.1.8 Acceptance Criteria for Dimensional Defects shall be made.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.1.8.1 Incorrect Joint Geometry. Acceptance 8.2.3.2 When complete inspection is specified, the
criteria for joint geometry shall be based upon the spe- entire length of weld in each designated joint shall be
cific dimensional tolerances given in the drawing inspected in conformance to 8.2.4.1 through 8.2.4.6.
requirements. In the absence of specific weld joint geom-
etry tolerances, any condition of the joint geometry in the 8.2.3.3 When spot radiography is specified, the
opinion of the Engineer which can reasonably be inspection and selection of the spots shall be in conform-
expected to produce unacceptable structural discontinui- ance to 8.2.5.1 through 8.2.5.4.
ties shall be considered incorrect joint geometry and 8.2.4 Radiographic Examination
unacceptable.
8.2.4.1 For welded joints that are to be radio-
8.1.8.2 Incorrect Weld Size
graphed, the weld ripples or weld surface irregularities,
(1) Fillet weld leg sizes shall conform to the follow-
inside and outside, shall be removed, where practical, by
ing tolerances based on a measurement of fused leg
any suitable mechanical process to such a degree that the
length:
resulting radiographic contrast due to any irregularities
(a) Weld sizes under 3/8 in. [10 mm]: 1/32 in.
cannot mask or be confused with the image of any
[1 mm], +1/8 in. [3 mm];
indication.
(b) Weld sizes 3/8 in. [10 mm] and over: 1/16 in.
[2 mm], +1/8 in. [3 mm]. 8.2.4.2 The radiographic sensitivity shall be judged
The average weld size of a given length shall not be based on hole-type or wire image quality indicators
less than the weld size specified on the drawing. The (IQIs). (See ASTM E 1025 and ASTM E 747 for IQI
average weld size is determined by the average of leg design specifications.) Radiographic technique and
length measurements obtained at 3 in. [75 mm] intervals equipment shall provide sufficient sensitivity to clearly
along the weld length. For welds under 3 in. [75 mm] in delineate the required IQIs and the essential holes or
length, the above tolerances are applied directly. wires as described in 8.2.4.4 and Table 18, and shown in
(2) Underfill is unacceptable for groove welds in butt Figures 44 through 47. Identifying numbers shall show
joints. clearly in the radiograph.

66
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Table 18
Standard Hole-Type and Wire Image Quality Indicator Requirements
Penetrameter

Source Side Film Side(2)

Nominal Material Thickness Hole-Type Essential Wire Diameter Hole-Type Essential Wire Diameter
Range(1) (T) in. [mm] Designation Hole in. [mm] Designation Hole in. [mm]

T 0.25 [6] 12 4T 0.008 [0.20] 10 4T 0.006 [0.15]


0.25 [6] < T 0.375 [10] 15 4T 0.010 [0.25] 12 4T 0.008 [0.20]
0.375 [10] < T 0.50 [13] 17 4T 0.013 [0.33] 15 4T 0.010 [0.25]
0.5 [13] < T 0.75 [20] 20 4T 0.016 [0.41] 17 4T 0.013 [0.33]
0.75 [20] < T 1.00 [25] 25 4T 0.020 [0.51] 20 4T 0.016 [0.41]
1.00 [25] < T 1.50 [40] 30 2T 0.025 [0.64] 25 2T 0.020 [0.51]
1.50 [40] < T 2.00 [50] 35 2T 0.032 [0.81] 30 2T 0.025 [0.64]
2.00 [50] < T 2.50 [65] 40 2T 0.040 [1.02] 35 2T 0.032 [0.81]
2.50 [65] < T 4.00 [100] 50 2T 0.050 [1.27] 40 2T 0.040 [1.02]
4.00 [100] < T 6.00 [150] 60 2T 0.063 [1.60] 50 2T 0.050 [1.27]
6.00 [150] < T 8.00 [200] 80 2T 0.100 [2.54] 60 2T 0.063 [1.60]
8.00 [200 < T 10.00 [250] 100 2T 0.126 [3.20] 80 2T 0.100 [2.54]
10.00 [250] < T 12.00 [300] 120 2T 0.160 [4.06] 100 2T 0.126 [3.20]
12.00 [300] < T 16.00 [400] 160 2T 0.250 [6.35] 120 2T 0.160 [4.06]
16.00 [400] < T 20.00 [500] 200 2T 0.320 [8.13] 160 2T 0.250 [6.35]
Notes:
(1) Single-wall radiographic thickness for tubular members.
(2) Applicable to tubular members only.

8.2.4.3 When weld reinforcement or backing or Figure 46. Figure 46 also permits an alternate IQI loca-
both, is not removed, or wire IQI alternate placement is tion for the use of wire IQIs. Where a radiograph repre-
not used, as shown in Figures 44 through 47, shimming sents less than 10 in. [250 mm] of weld length in
is required. The total thickness of steel between the IQI transition joints, IQIs will be placed as shown in Figure
and the film shall be approximately equal to the average 47.
weld thickness measured through reinforcement and (c) When a radiograph does not show the outer
backing. To ensure this, steel shims shall be placed under edge of the weld area, an IQI shall be placed perpendicu-
the IQI. The shims shall extend at least 1/8 in. [3 mm] lar to the joint with the smallest wire or hole on the outer
beyond three sides of the IQI. edge of the inspection area being radiographed.
8.2.4.4 To verify the radiographic technique (d) For circumferential welds using a single ex-
employed, the following requirements shall be met: posure, with the source of radiation placed at the center
(1) Hole-type IQIs or wire IQIs shall show clearly on of curvature, a minimum of three IQIs equally spaced
each radiograph. The minimum number and their about the circumference are required.
required locations shall be the following: (2) The thickness of a hole-type IQI and the essential
(a) For welds joining nominally equal thickness, hole or wire shall be as specified in Table 18. A smaller
where a radiograph represents 10 in. [250 mm] or greater essential hole or wire or a thinner hole-type IQI may be
of weld length, two IQIs will be placed as shown in selected by the Manufacturer, provided all other provi-
Figure 44. Where a radiograph represents less than 10 in. sions for radiography are met.
[250 mm] of weld length, one IQI will be placed as Thickness shall be measured as T1 or T2, or both, at
shown in Figure 45. the locations shown in Figures 44 through 47 and may be
(b) For welds at transition thickness, where a ra- increased to provide for the thickness of allowable weld
diograph represents 10 in. [250 mm] or greater of weld reinforcement, provided shims are used as specified in
length, two IQIs shall be placed on the thinner of the two 8.2.4.3. Steel backing shall not be considered part of the
sections and one IQI on the thicker section as shown in weld or reinforcement in IQI selection.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 67
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 44Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on
Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length

Figure 45Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on


Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length

68
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Figure 46Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on


Transition Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length

Figure 47Radiographic Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on


Transition Joints Less Than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length

69
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(3) Hole-type IQIs shall be manufactured from steel, ing operator or welder is made. Under conditions where
preferably stainless steel, and shall conform to the two or more welders or welding operators make weld
requirements of ASTM E 1025, Practice for Hole-Type layers in a joint or on the two sides of a double welded
Image Quality Indicators Used for Radiography. Each butt joint, one spot examination may represent the work
hole-type IQI shall be manufactured with three holes, of both welders and welding operators.
one of which shall be of a diameter equal to twice the (3) The locations of the spots to be examined and the
hole-type IQI thickness (2T). The diameter of the two time after the weld is completed shall be agreed upon by
remaining holes shall be selected by the Manufacturer. the purchaser or his designated representative and by the
They will ordinarily be equal to one time (1T) and four Manufacturer.
times (4T) the hole-type IQI thickness. Hole-type IQI
designations 10 through 25 shall contain a 4T hole. 8.2.5.2 Spot examination by radiography shall be
(4) Wire image quality indicators (IQI) shall be man- made in conformance to 8.2.4.1 through 8.2.4.6. The
ufactured in accordance with ASTM E 747, Guide for minimum length of spot radiograph shall be 6 in. [150 mm].
Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing Using Wire The acceptability of welds examined by spot radiography
Penetrameters. shall be judged by the following standards:
(1) Welds in which the radiographs show any type of
8.2.4.5 All radiographs shall be free from exces-
crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration shall
sive artifacts, chemical or other processing defects that
be unacceptable.
could interfere with proper interpretation.
(2) Welds in which the radiographs show inclusions
or cavities shall be unacceptable if the length of any such
8.2.4.6 Identification markers, whose images
imperfection is greater than 2/3T, where T is the thick-
appear on the film, shall be placed adjacent to the weld
ness of the thinner plate welded. If several imperfections
on the part, not on the film; their locations shall be
within these limitations exist in a line, the welds shall be
marked on the surface near the weld in such a manner
judged acceptable if the sum of the longest dimensions of
that a defect appearing on a radiograph may be accu-
all such imperfections is not more than T in a length of
rately located and that it is evident on the film that com-
6T and if the longest imperfections considered are sepa-
plete coverage of the weld has been obtained.
rated by at least 3L of acceptable weld metal, where L is
(1) The job identification and weld seam identifica-
the longest imperfection. The maximum length of
tion shall be indicated on each film.
acceptable imperfection shall be 3/4 in. [20 mm]. Any
(2) A complete set of radiographs for each job shall such imperfection shorter than 1/4 in. [6 mm] shall be
be retained by the Manufacturer and kept on file for a acceptable for any plate thickness.
period of at least five years or as required by contract.
8.2.5.3 Evaluation and Retests
8.2.5 Spot Radiographic Examination of Welded
Joints11 (1) Where spot radiography is acceptable, the entire
weld length represented by the radiograph is acceptable.
8.2.5.1 Minimum extent of spot radiography for (2) If a spot radiographed in conformance to these
welds not radiographed for their complete length shall be requirements discloses welding which does not comply
as follows: with the minimum quality requirements, two additional
(1) One spot shall be examined in the first 50 ft spots shall be taken adjacent to the original spot, one on
[15 m] of weld length and one spot shall be examined each side.
for each additional 50 ft [15 m] of weld length or fraction (a) If the additional spots examined show the
thereof. When identical welds individually less than 50 ft welding meets the minimum quality requirements, the
[15 m] of weld length, 50 ft [15 m] increments of entire weld, represented by the three radiographs is
their total weld length may be represented by one spot acceptable. The defective weld found in the first radio-
examination. graph shall be repaired and radiographically reinspected.
(2) Such additional spots as may be required shall be (b) If either of the two additional spots examined
selected so an examination of the welding of each weld- shows welding which does not comply with the mini-
mum quality requirements, the entire length of weld rep-
11. Spot radiography, in accordance with these rules, will not resented shall be rejected. The entire rejected weld shall
ensure a predetermined quality level throughout the product be removed and the joint shall be rewelded or, at the
fabricated. An accepted weld, according to these spot radiogra- Manufacturers option, the entire length of weld repre-
phy rules, may still contain defects which might be disclosed sented shall be completely radiographed and the defec-
on further examination. tive welding corrected.

70
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

8.2.5.4 Defect Removal and Repair (see Section 9) (1) Any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or
incomplete joint penetration.
8.2.6 Acceptance Standards for Radiography
(2) Any elongated inclusion, such as slag, which has
8.2.6.1 Scope. The standards are applicable to fer- a length greater than 1/4 in. [6 mm] for E up to 3/4 in.
ritic steels. [20 mm], 1/3E for E from 3/4 to 2 1/4 in. [20 to 60 mm],
8.2.6.2 Terminology 3/4 in. [20 mm] for E over 2 1/4 in. [60 mm].
(1) Rounded Indications. Indications with a maxi- (3) Any group of inclusions in line that has an aggre-
mum length of three times the width or less on the radio- gate length greater than E in a weld length 12E, except
graph are defined as rounded indications. These when the distance between the successive imperfections
indications may be circular, elliptical, conical, or irregu- exceeds 6L, where L is the length of the longest imper-
lar in shape and may have tails. When evaluating the size fection in the group.
of an indication, the tail shall be included. The indication (4) Rounded indications in excess of that specified by
may be from any inclusion in the weld, such as porosity, Table 19 and Figures 48 through 55 (ASTM E 390, Ref-
slag, or tungsten. erence Radiographs for Steel Fusion Welds may be used
(2) Aligned Indications. A sequence of four or more in lieu of these figures).
rounded indications shall be considered to be aligned (a) Maximum Size of Rounded Indication (see
when they touch a line parallel to the length of the weld Table 19). An isolated indication is separated from an
drawn through the center of the two outer rounded adjacent indication by 1 in. [25 mm] or more.
indications. (b) Aligned Rounded Indications. Aligned
(3) Thickness E. The thickness of the weld, E, is rounded indications are acceptable when the summation
excluding any allowable reinforcement. For a butt weld of the diameters of the indications is less than E in
joining two members having different thicknesses at the a length of 12E (see Figure 48). The length of groups
weld, E is the thinner of these two thicknesses. If a full of aligned groups shall meet the requirements of Figure
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

penetration weld includes a reinforcing fillet weld, the 49.


thickness of the throat of the fillet shall be included in E.
(c) Spacing. The distance between adjacent
8.2.6.3 Acceptance Criteria. Sections of the weld rounded indications is not a factor in determining
shown by radiography to have any of the following types acceptance or rejection, except as required for isolated
of imperfections shall be judged unacceptable. indications or groups of aligned indications.

Table 19
Examples of Acceptable Indications(1)
Maximum Size of Acceptable
Rounded Indication
in. [mm] Maximum Size of
Thickness t Nonrelevant Indication
in. [mm] Random Isolated in. [mm]

< 1/8 [3] 1/4t 1/3t 1/10t


1/8 [3] to < 3/16 [5] 0.031 [0.8] 0.042 [1.1] 0.015 [0.4]
3/16 [5] to < 1/4 [6} 0.047 [1.2] 0.063 [1.6] 0.015 [0.4]
1/4 [6] to < 5/16 [8] 0.063 [1.6] 0.083 [2.1] 0.015 [0.4]
5/16 [8] to < 3/8 [10] 0.078 [2.0] 0.104 [2.6] 0.031 [0.8]
3/8 [10] to < 7/16 [11] 0.091 [2.3] 0.125 [3.2] 0.031 [0.8]
7/16 [11] to < 1/2 [13] 0.109 [2.8] 0.146 [3.7] 0.031 [0.8]
1/2 [13] to < 9/16 [14] 0.125 [3.2] 0.168 [4.3] 0.031 [0.8]
9/16 [14] to < 5/8 [16] 0.142 [3.6] 0.188 [4.8] 0.031 [0.8]
5/8 [16] to < 11/16 [17] 0.156 [4.0] 0.210 [5.3] 0.031 [0.8]
11/16 [17] to < 3/4 [20] 0.156 [4.0] 0.230 [5.8] 0.031 [0.8]
3/4 [20] to 2 [50] 0.156 [4.0] 0.250 [6.4] 0.031 [0.8]
> 2 [50] 0.156 [4.0] 0.375 [9.5] 0.063 [1.6]
Note:
(1) This table contains examples only.

71
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Note: Sum of L1 through Lx shall be less than t in a length of 12t.

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.1 with permission from ASME.

Figure 48Examples of Aligned Rounded Indications

Note: Sum of the group lengths shall be less than t in a length of 12t.

Maximum Group Length Minimum Spacing Between Groups


L = 1/4 in. [6 mm] for t < 3/4 in. [20 mm]
L = 1/3t for 3/4 in. [20 mm] t 2-1/4 in. [57 mm] 3L where L is the length of the longest adjacent group being evaluated.
L = 3/4 in. [20 mm] for t > 2-1/4 in. [57 mm]

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.2 with permission from ASME.

Figure 49Examples of Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.3 with permission from ASME.

Figure 50Charts for Thickness Equal to 1/8 in. [3 mm] to 1/4 in. [6 mm], Inclusive

72
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.4 with permission from ASME.

Figure 51Charts for Thickness Over 1/4 in. [6 mm] to 3/8 in. [10 mm], Inclusive

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.5 with permission from ASME.

Figure 52Charts for Thickness Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] to 3/4 in. [20 mm], Inclusive

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

73
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.6 with permission from ASME.

Figure 53Charts for Thickness Over 3/4 in. [20 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm], Inclusive

(d) Rounded Indications Charts. The rounded in- tions. The length of an acceptable cluster shall not
dications as determined from the radiographic film shall exceed the lesser of 1 in. [25 mm] or 2E. Where more
not exceed that shown in the charts. The charts in Figures than one cluster is present, the sum of the lengths of the
50 through 55 illustrate various types of assorted ran- clusters shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm] in 6 in. [150 mm]
domly dispersed and clustered rounded indications for length of weld.
different weld thicknesses greater than 1/8 in. [3 mm]. (g) Image Density. Density within the image of
These charts represent the maximum acceptable concen- the indication may vary and is not a criterion for accep-
tration limits for rounded indications. The chart for each tance or rejection.
thickness range represents full scale 6 in. [150 mm] ra-
8.2.6.4 Defect Removal and Repair (see Section 9)
diographs, and shall not be enlarged or reduced. The dis-
tributions shown are not necessarily the patterns that may 8.3 Ultrasonic Inspection
appear on the radiographs, but are typical of the concen-
tration and size of indications permitted. 8.3.1 General. Ultrasonic examination of welded
joints, where required, shall be conducted in conform-
(e) Weld Thickness E Less than 1/8 in. [3 mm].
ance to the procedures specified herein, which include
For E less than 1/8 in. [3 mm], the maximum number of
standards for ultrasonic acceptance or in conformance to
rounded indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in.
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 12 or Divi-
[150 mm] length of weld. A proportionally fewer num-
sion 2, Article 9-3, ASTM E 164, and ASTM E 587.
ber of indications shall be permitted in welds less than
6 in. [150 mm] in length. 8.3.2 This procedure contains the minimum require-
(f) Clustered Indications. The illustrations for ments for the ultrasonic inspection of butt, corner, and
clustered indications show up to four times as many indi- T-type welded joints by the contact method and is appli-
cations in a local area as that shown for random indica- cable to welds in carbon and low-alloy steels.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
74
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.7 with permission from ASME.

Figure 54Charts for Thickness Over 2 in. [50 mm] to 4 in. [100 mm], Inclusive

8.3.3 Criteria are given in Table 1 for two classes of 8.3.4.3 When Class II welds are specified, the loca-
inspection: tion inspected shall be a 6 in. [150 mm] length of weld.
(1) Class I for complete inspection of the weld where The number of locations shall total 10% of the total
joint performance is equivalent to the base metal under length of the weld. When an inspected location requires
all conditions; repair, two adjacent locations, one on each side, shall be
(2) Class II for welds when 10% of the length of the inspected also. If defects requiring repair are shown in
weld is inspected after magnetic particle or liquid pene- either of these locations, the entire weld in that joint shall
trant inspection has been performed. be inspected.
8.3.4 Extent of Inspection
8.3.4.4 Information furnished to the bidder shall
8.3.4.1 Contractual specifications shall designate identify the extent of ultrasonic inspection to be performed.
the class of ultrasonic inspection to be performed by
identifying the welded joints to be inspected as Class I or 8.3.5 Requirements
Class II.
8.3.4.2 When Class I welds are designated, the 8.3.5.1 Operator Qualifications and Test Speci-
entire length of the weld shall be inspected. fications. The ultrasonic operator shall be thoroughly

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

75
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Adapted from ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 2004 Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 4, Figure 4.8 with permission from ASME.

Figure 55Charts for Thickness Over 4 in. [100 mm]

familiar with the calibration and operation of the Practice for Ultrasonic Angle Beam Examination by the
equipment used and the inspection requirements of this Contact Method.
procedure. The inspector shall have demonstrated ability
8.3.5.2 Equipment. The ultrasonic inspection
to calibrate and operate the equipment in conformance to
equipment shall consist of the inspection instrument with
this procedure. Personnel qualifications and records shall scan data presentation, sweep length, calibrated sensitiv-
be in conformance to ASNT SNT-TC-1A, Recom- ity, and time corrected gain controls. The search unit and
mended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A. Only individuals qual- accessories shall have the following capabilities:
ified for NDT Level I, working under supervision of an (1) Search Unit. The maximum dimension of the
individual qualified for NDT Level II, or individuals transducer active element shall not exceed 1 in. [25 mm].
qualified for NDT Level II or III may perform ultrasonic The shear wave transducer shall be fitted with a plastic
weld testing. Testing shall be performed according to wedge designed to induce shear waves into the material
ASTM E 164, Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact to be tested at an angle of 45, 60, or 70 within a maxi-
Examination of Weldments and ASTM E 587, Standard mum tolerance of 3.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
76
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(2) Calibration Standards. Calibration standards 3/4 in. [20 mm] vertical lines on the calibration standard,
are shown in Figures 56, 57, and 58. Calibration refer- the signal will appear on the screen at the depth for
ence standards shall be made from material acoustically which that line is marked. A B (for bottom) is marked
similar to the material to be tested. Standards such as on the screen at the depth equal to the weld thickness and
IIW or ASTM may be used, provided the reference level a T (for top) is placed on the screen at the depth equal
sensitivity for instrument/search unit calibration is to twice the weld thickness (see Figure 59 for typical
adjusted to be the equivalent to that achieved by the ref- screen calibration).
erence standard. (5) Test Sensitivity Calibration
The following is a brief description of the calibration (a) For Class I inspections, the instrument gain
blocks: and attenuation correction controls shall be adjusted to
(a) The 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes are used peak all signals from the 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter
in setting the test sensitivity level. holes within the range of test at a minimum of 80% and a
(b) The 1/8 in. [3 mm] diameter holes are used to maximum of 95% of full screen height. Minor adjust-
check the accuracy of the refracted angle produced by ments of depth calibration should be made using the
the plastic wedge. peaked signals from the holes to compensate for slight
(c) The diagonal lines mark the positions of the variations in search unit angles. The screen shall be
transducer to detect the 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes. divided by two horizontal lines at 20% (the disregard
(d) The 3/4 in. [20 mm] vertical lines mark the level or DRL) and 80% (the amplitude rejection level or
positions of the transducer when calibrating for depth. ARL) or full screen height.
(e) The 1/4 in. [6 mm] vertical lines are used for (b) For Class II inspections, the instrument gain
measuring distance from the search unit to the hole. and attenuation correction controls shall be adjusted to
(f) The angle check area marks the position of peak all signals from 3/64 in. [1.2 mm] diameter holes
the transducer when checking the accuracy of the re- within the range of test at a minimum of 80% and a maxi-
fracted angle produced by the plastic wedge. mum of 95% of full screen. Minor adjustments of depth

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
8.3.5.3 Equipment Calibration calibration should be made using the peaked signals from
(1) Search Unit Angles. Search unit angles shall be the holes to compensate for slight variations in search unit
selected as follows: angles. The screen shall be divided by two horizontal
(a) For plate thicknesses 1/2 in. [13 mm] to, but lines at 40% (the DRL) and 80% (the ARL) of full screen.
not including, 1-1/2 in. [40 mm], a wedge angle produc- 8.3.5.4 Surface Preparation. All surfaces to
ing a 60 or 70 shear wave in the material to be tested which a search unit is applied shall be free of loose scale,
shall be used. loose paint, weld spatter, grease, dirt, and any other
(b) For plate thicknesses 1-1/2 in. [40 mm] to, foreign matter that might interfere with the scanning pro-
but not including, 2-1/2 in. [60 mm], a wedge angle pro- cedure. The surface must have a contour permitting inti-
ducing a 45 or 60 shear wave in the material to be tested mate coupling between the search unit and the scanning
shall be used. surface.
(c) For plate thicknesses 2-1/2 in. [60 mm] and
over, a wedge angle producing a 45 shear wave in the 8.3.5.5 Test Procedure
material to be tested shall be used. (1) Lamination Test
(2) Angle Check. With the transducer positioned for (a) Before the shear wave test is conducted on
maximum signal response from the 1/8 in. [3 mm] diam- welds in carbon and low-alloy steel plates, a compres-
eter hole in the calibration block, the sound emission sional wave test shall be performed to determine if any
point of the transducer shall fall on or between the two laminar discontinuities are present that might interfere,
lines in the angle-check area. unless a test for lamination has been previously con-
(3) Flaw-Locating Device Adjustment (if used). ducted on the plate material.
With the sound emission point of the transducer aligned (b) The test shall be performed using a 1 in.
with the 3/4 in. [20 mm] vertical line on the calibration [25 mm] diameter 2.25 MHz longitudinal wave trans-
block representing the thickness of the weld, the flaw ducer. With the first back reflection from the plate ad-
locating device is adjusted so that the line on the rule rep- justed to 80% of full screen height, the full width of the
resenting the weld thickness is in alignment with the cor- area to be scanned by the shear wave test shall be scanned.
responding 1/4 in. [6 mm] line on the calibration block. If a discontinuity is noted that causes a complete loss or
(4) Depth Calibration. The instrument is calibrated transposition of the first back reflection, the discontinuity
for the range of depth to be inspected using the large shall be noted on the weld inspection report. The weld in
signal from the end of the block. When the emission the area of the discontinuity cannot be reliably tested with
point marked on the transducer is aligned with one of the shear waves from the side containing the discontinuity.

77
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.


1.2 3/640 19 3/4 39.50 1.555 112.62 4.434
2.31 0.091 19.76 0.778 44 1-3/4 125.68 4.948
4.62 0.182 25 1-0/0 51 2 139.70 5.500
4.75 0.187 25.4 1.000 57 2-1/4 145.44 5.726
6 1/4 32 1-1/4 60.27 2.373 165.18 6.503
13 1/2 38 1-1/2 64 2-1/20/0 182.40 7.181
87.22 3.434 215.90 8.500
General Notes: All dimensions in millimeters except angles.
(a) Material is same as material to be tested.
(b) Thickness = 32 mm [1-1/4 in.].

Figure 5670 Calibration Standard

78
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.


1.2 3/640 25 1-0/0 70 2-3/4 107.4 4.214
3.2 0.125 29.31 1.154 74.04 2.915 108 4-1/4
3.66 0.144 32 1-1/4 76 3 114 4-1/2
6 1/4 38 1-1/2 83 3-1/4 140 5-1/2
7.32 0.288 41.05 1.616 87.99 3.464 151.03 5.946
13 1/2 44 1-3/4 88.01 3.4650/0 184.02 7.245
14.68 0.578 51 2 89 3-1/2 217.02 8.544
19 3/4 57 2-1/4 95 3-3/4 234.95 9.250
19.05 0.750 64 2-1/2 102 4
General Notes: All dimensions in millimeters except angles.
(a) Material is same as material to be tested.
(b) Thickness = 32 mm [1-1/4 in.].

Figure 5760 Calibration Standard

79
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.


1.2 3/64 38 1-1/2 95 3-3/4 152 6-0/0
1.57 0.062 44 1-3/4 102 4-0/0 159 6-1/4
3 1/8 51 2-0/0 108 4-1/4 165 6-1/2
6 1/4 57 2-1/4 114 4-1/2 171 6-3/4
13 1/2 64 2-1/2 121 4-3/4 178 7-0/0
14.27 0.562 70 2-3/4 127 5-0/0 184 7-1/4
19 3/4 76 3-0/0 133 5-1/4 191 7-1/2
25 1 83 3-1/4 140 5-1/2 203 8-0/0
32 1-1/4 89 3-1/2 146 5-3/4 241 9-1/2
General Notes: All dimensions in millimeters except angles.
(a) Material is same as material to be tested.
(b) Thickness = 32 mm [1-1/4 in.].

Figure 5845 Calibration Standard

80
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

General Notes: Dimensions: in. [mm] except for angles.


(a) Weld thickness = 1 in. [25 mm].
(b) Angle is 60.
(c) Depth calibration range is 1/2 in. [13 mm] to 2 in. [50 mm].

Figure 59Typical Screen Calibration

(2) Butt Joint Weld area wide enough to ensure that the entire weld and heat-
(a) The entire weld volume and heat-affected affected zone are covered by the second half of the first
zone, excluding the weld reinforcement, shall be scanned skip distance.
with shear waves by directing the sound beam toward or (c) To detect transverse discontinuities in welds
across and along the weld axis (see Figure 60). not ground flush, the search unit shall be placed on the
(b) To detect longitudinal discontinuities in welds base-metal surface at the edge of the weld. The sound
not ground flush, the search unit shall be oscillated to the beam shall be directed by angling the search unit toward
left and right with an included angle of approximately the weld at approximately 15 to the longitudinal axis of
30 while continuously scanning perpendicularly to the the weld. Scanning shall be performed by moving the
weld. The lateral movement advancing the search unit search unit along the weld edge from both sides on one
along the longitudinal axis of the weld shall not exceed surface and from two opposing directions.
75% of the transducer width. The weld shall be scanned (d) To detect longitudinal discontinuities in
from one surface with an effective beam width on two welds ground flush, the search unit shall be oscillated to
sides or from one side on two surfaces (see Figure 61). the left and right with an included angle of approxi-
The scanning area shall begin with the search unit mately 30 while continuously scanning perpendicularly
touching the weld reinforcement and shall include an across the weld. The weld shall be scanned from one

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

81
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 60Test ProcedureButt Joint Welds

Figure 61Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities


in Butt Joint Welds Not Ground Flush

surface on two sides of the weld when possible. Where to ensure coverage of the weld and heat-affected zone
this procedure is impossible, the weld may be scanned shall be scanned.
from one side on two surfaces or from one side on one (3) Corner Welds
surface using at least a full skip distance (see Figure 62).
The lateral movement advancing the search unit along (a) The entire weld and heat-affected zone, ex-
the longitudinal axis of the weld shall not exceed 75% of cluding the weld reinforcement, shall be scanned with
the transducer width per transverse scan. shear waves by directing the sound beam toward or
(e) To detect transverse discontinuities in welds across and along the weld axis.
ground flush, the search unit shall be oscillated to the left (b) To detect longitudinal discontinuities, the
and right with an included angle of approximately 30 search unit shall be oscillated to the left and right with an
while continuously scanning along the top of the weld included angle of approximately 30 while continuously
from two opposing directions. If the weld width exceeds scanning perpendicularly to the weld. The lateral move-
the width of the transducer, parallel scans shall be per- ment advancing the search unit along the longitudinal
formed so that each scan overlaps the previous scan by at axis of the weld shall not exceed 75% of the transducer
least 25% of the transducer width. An area wide enough width per transverse scan. The weld shall be tested using

82
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 62Method for Detecting Longitudinal Discontinuities


in Butt Joint Welds Ground Flush

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
the first full skip distance from surface A as shown in from surface C as shown in Figure 65, using the first
Figure 63. half skip distance.
(c) To detect transverse discontinuities, the (5) Discontinuities. If discontinuities are detected,
search unit shall be oscillated to the left and right with an the sound beam shall be directed to maximize the signal
included angle of approximately 30 while continuously amplitude. If the signal amplitude equals or exceeds the
scanning along the top of the weld from two opposing DRL, the maximum amplitude, location, length, depth,
directions. If the weld width exceeds the width of the and zone location shall be determined.
transducer, parallel scans shall be made so that each scan
overlaps the previous scan by at least 25% of the trans- (a) To determine the length of a discontinuity,
ducer width. An area wide enough to ensure complete the transducer shall be positioned for maximum signal
coverage of the weld and heat-affected zone shall be response and moved parallel to the discontinuity axis
scanned. until the signal drops rapidly to the base line. The trans-
(4) T-Joint Welds. The entire weld and heat-affected ducer is then returned to the position where the indica-
zone, excluding the weld reinforcement, shall be scanned tion began to drop rapidly to the base line. The plate is
with shear waves. The search unit shall be oscillated to marked at the center of the transducer. This mark shall be
the left and right with an included angle of approxi- defined as one extremity of the discontinuity and the pro-
mately 30 while continuously scanning perpendicularly cedure shall be repeated in the opposite direction to de-
to the weld. The lateral movement advancing the search termine the other extremity.
unit along the longitudinal axis of the weld shall not (b) The depth of a discontinuity from the scan-
exceed 75% of the transducer width per transverse scan. ning surface shall be determined by the position of
The weld shall be tested from surfaces A and B as the signal on the viewing screen when the signal is
shown in Figure 64, using the first full skip distance, or maximized.

83
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Figure 63Method for Detecting Longitudinal


Discontinuities in Corner Welds Not Ground Flush

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 64Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds

Figure 65Alternate Procedure for Testing T-Joint Welds

84
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(c) The zone location of a discontinuity shall be (a) The location, length, depth, maximum ampli-
determined by observing the depth of the signal on the tude, and zone location of discontinuities having a signal
screen and marking the weld at the corresponding depth amplitude that equals or exceeds the DRL shall be re-
on the material service. corded and reported.
(b) Indications less than the DRL shall be
8.3.5.6 Acceptance Standards
disregarded.
(1) Class I Inspections. Any discontinuity whose
(2) Record Data and Report Sheets. The ultrasonic
reflection exceeds 80% of full screen height shall be
test data and report sheets for inspection results of welds
rejected. Discontinuities whose reflections equal 20% or
shall contain, as a minimum, the following information:
greater up to and including 80% of full screen height
shall be evaluated as follows: (a) Weld identification,
(a) If the discontinuity length exceeds T/2 (where (b) Location,
T = thickness of the thinner member), it shall be rejected. (c) Type of weld,
In no case shall any single discontinuity length exceed (d) Type of material,
1-1/2 in. [40 mm]. (e) Thickness of material,
(b) Any two discontinuities separated by less (f) Joint identification,
than 2L of sound metal (where L = length of the longest (g) Segment number,
discontinuity), shall be considered a single discontinuity. (h) Length of weld inspected,
The maximum distance between the outer extremities of (i) Operational procedure identification,
any two such discontinuities or the sum of their lengths, (j) Equipment used for inspection and its record
whichever is greater, shall not exceed the length speci- of calibration [see 8.3.5.8(3)],
fied in 8.3.5.6(1)(a). (k) Reference block identification,
(c) If the total accumulative length of discontinu- (l) Inspection results,
ities in any 12 in. [300 mm] of weld length exceeds 1T,
(m) Acceptance or rejection,
that weld length shall be rejected. When less than 12 in.
(n) Signature of inspection personnel, and
[300 mm] of weld is inspected, the 1T criterion applies to
the length inspected. (o) Date of test.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(2) Class II Inspections. Any discontinuity whose 8.3.5.8 Special Notes
reflection exceeds 80% of full screen height and whose (1) Supplemental ultrasonic inspection techniques
length exceeds 1/4 in. [6 mm] shall be rejected. Adjacent that contribute to the final inspection result shall be
discontinuities whose reflections exceed 80% of full recorded, if used.
screen, separated by less than 2L of sound metal (where (2) All repaired areas, plus an additional 3 in. [75 mm]
L = length of longest discontinuity), shall be considered beyond each end of repair, shall be retested as original
a single discontinuity. Discontinuities whose reflections welds and the test results shall be recorded in conform-
equal 40% of full screen height, up to and including ance to 8.3.5.7.
80%, shall be evaluated as follows:
(3) The instrument shall be allowed to warm up
(a) If the discontinuity length exceeds 1T (where before calibration is attempted. The equipment shall be
T = thickness of the thinner member), it shall be rejected. calibrated with the reference calibration standard each
In no case shall any single discontinuity length exceed time it is used and shall be recalibrated at least once
2 in. [50 mm]. every four hours during continuous use, whenever the
(b) Any two discontinuities separated by less electric power to the instrument has been interrupted or
than 2L of sound metal (where L = length of longest dis- whenever the calibration of the equipment is suspected
continuity) shall be considered as a single discontinuity. of being in error.
The maximum distance between the outer extremities of
any two such adjacent discontinuities or the sum of their 8.3.5.9 Defect Removal and Repair (see Section 9)
lengths, whichever is greater, shall not exceed the length
8.4 Magnetic Particle Inspection
specified in 8.3.5.6(2)(a).
(c) If the cumulative length of discontinuities in 8.4.1 General. Magnetic-particle inspection of
any 12 in. [300 mm] of weld exceeds 2T, that weld welded joints, where required, shall be conducted in con-
length shall be rejected. When less than 12 in. [300 mm] formance to the procedures specified herein, which
of weld is inspected, the 2T criterion applies to the length include standards for acceptance.
inspected.
8.4.2 Personnel qualification and records shall be in
8.3.5.7 Test Results conformance to the ASNT SNT-TC-1A, Recommended
(1) Recording and Reporting Discontinuities Practice No. SNT-TC-1A.

85
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

8.4.3 Extent of Inspection 8.4.4.3 Lighting. The weld areas shall be ade-
quately illuminated for proper evaluation of the indica-
8.4.3.1 Information furnished to the bidder shall tions revealed on the weld surface.
clearly identify the extent of magnetic particle inspection
to be performed. 8.4.4.4 Examination Medium. The magnetic par-
ticles used for detection of defects shall be as follows:
8.4.4 Equipment
(1) Dry Particles. Dry particles used shall be of high
8.4.4.1 Source of Magnetic Fields. The following permeability and low retentivity and of such size and
magnetizing equipment shall be capable of inducing shape as will produce suitable indications. It is desirable
a magnetic flux of suitable intensity in the desired that the color be such as to provide adequate contrast
direction: with the background of the surface being examined.
(1) Prod Method (2) Wet Particles. Wet particles used shall be red or
(a) Portable prod-type electrical contacts shall be black or, alternatively, may be fluorescent when viewed
spaced 3 to 8 in. [75 to 200 mm] apart using direct cur- under ultraviolet illumination. The particles shall be sus-
rent at 100 to 125 Amperes per 1 in. [25 mm] of spacing. pended in a suitable liquid medium in the concentration
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be recommended by the manufacturer of the particles. Ampli-
carried out using the dry particle medium. Prods shall be fied details on the use of wet particles are given in ASTM
placed so that the magnetizing flux during one examina- E 709, Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination.
tion is perpendicular to the other examination direction. 8.4.5 Surface Preparation
(2) Coil Method
(a) Multiple coils shall be looped around the part 8.4.5.1 Surface FinishCompleted Surfaces.
and shall be capable of producing a magnetic field As-welded surfaces shall be considered suitable for
strength of 3000 to 10,000 Ampere turns using direct inspection without any grinding, provided the following
current. conditions are met:
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be (1) There shall be no roll-over or undercutting, and
carried out using dry or wet particle medium. The second the deposited metal shall be fused smoothly and uni-
examination shall be with magnetic flux at right angles to formly into the plate surfaces.
the first examination or a different magnetic source may (2) The finished weld shall be reasonably smooth and
be used. free from irregularities, grooves, or depressions.
(c) Examination of welds by the magnetic parti- 8.4.5.2 Precleaning. The materials or parts to be
cle method shall be made over an area including the weld examined shall be dry and free of oil or other foreign
and base metal and extending at least 1/2 in. [13 mm] on matter which might interfere with the formation or inter-
each side of the weld. pretation of magnetic particle patterns or indications. Oil
(3) Yoke Method or grease shall be removed with petroleum distillate or
(a) Either alternating current or permanent yokes alcohol.
shall be used, equivalent to a prod method of 25 to
8.4.5.3 Application of Magnetic Field
30 Amperes per 1 in. [25 mm] of prod spacing.
(1) Direction. The magnetic field shall be induced in
(b) At least two separate examinations shall be
more than one direction to insure detection of discontinu-
done using dry or wet particle medium. The second ex-
ities having axes in any direction.
amination shall be with the magnetic flux at right angles
to the first examination. (2) Direct Magnetization. When using direct mag-
netization, direct current, or half-wave rectified alternat-
8.4.4.2 Particle Application and Removal ing current, current shall be passed through the part
(1) Dry Particles. Dry particles may be applied by being tested for a minimum of 0.2 second.
means of mechanical shakers, bulb blowers, or mechani- (3) Indirect Magnetization. Indirect magnetization
cal blowers. Excess particles shall be removed by means shall be accomplished by passing magnetizing current
of a dry air current of sufficient force to remove the through an auxiliary conductor for a minimum of 0.2
excess particles which are not indicative of discontinui- second.
ties. Extreme care should be taken when removing the (4) Precaution. Care shall be taken to prevent local
magnetic particles so that any particles indicative of sub- overheating, arcing, or burning the surface being
surface indications are not removed. inspected. The magnetizing current shall not be turned
(2) Wet Particles. Wet particles may be applied by on until after the prods have been properly positioned in
means of spraying or dipping per ASTM E 709, Practice contact with the surface and current shall be turned off
for Magnetic Particle Examination. before the prods are removed.

86 --`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

(5) Demagnetization. When necessary, demagneti- 8.5.5 Procedure


zation shall be performed.
8.5.5.1 Temperature. The temperature of the pen-
8.4.6 Acceptance Standard etrant and the part to be inspected shall be 40 to 125F
[5 to 50C] before application of the penetrant. When
8.4.6.1 Surfaces examined by the magnetic particle inspection is necessary under conditions where the tem-
method shall be free of laps, fissures, cracks, or other perature of the penetrant or the inspection surface is
defects. In-line porosity which appears as a linear accu- outside the 40 to 125F [5 to 50C] range, the tempera-
mulation of magnetic powder shall also be removed. tures shall be adjusted to bring them within this range
or the procedure shall be qualified or demonstrated to
8.4.6.2 Only such defects need be removed as to
the satisfaction of the customer to be effective at other
render the surface acceptable to the requirements of this
temperatures.
specification. Areas containing defects shall be ground
out to remove the defects. The ground out areas shall be 8.5.5.2 Surface FinishCompleted Surfaces.
reinspected to verify the complete removal of the defect. As-welded surfaces shall be considered suitable for
Minor cavities resulting from the removal of shallow dis- inspection without any grinding, provided all of the fol-
continuities shall be blended into the surrounding area. lowing conditions are met:
They need not be repair welded if they do not reduce (1) There shall be no roll-over or undercutting, val-
wall thickness or drawing requirements or affect leys or grooves along the axis of, or within, the weld.
machined or gasket fits. Other defects may be repair (2) The deposited metal shall be fused smoothly and
welded by means of the original welding procedure or an uniformly into the plate surfaces.
approved repair welding process. Completed repairs (3) The finished weld shall be reasonably smooth and
shall be reinspected by the method originally used. free from irregularities, grooves, or depressions.
8.4.6.3 Defect Removal and Repair (see Section 9) 8.5.5.3 Precleaning
(1) Rust, scale, slag, weld spatter, or other hard tena-
8.5 Liquid Penetrant Inspection
cious materials shall be removed by wire brushing,
8.5.1 Liquid penetrant inspection of welded joints, grinding, or machining.
where required, shall be conducted in conformance to the (2) All types of grinding wheels are permitted on
procedures specified herein, which include standards for steel.
acceptance. (3) All oil and grease shall be removed with petro-
leum distillate or alcohol using paper towels or lint-free
8.5.2 Personnel qualification and records shall be in cloth.
conformance to ASNT SNT-TC-1A, Recommended
Practice No. SNT-TC-1A. 8.5.5.4 Application of Penetrant. The surface to
be inspected shall be thoroughly dry before application
8.5.3 Extent of Inspection. Information furnished to of the liquid penetrant. The penetrant may be applied by
the bidder shall identify the extent of liquid penetrant spraying, brushing, or immersion. The area to be
inspection to be performed. inspected shall be completely covered. The surface shall
be kept wet for a minimum of six minutes and during this
8.5.4 Equipment
period additional penetrant should be added, if neces-
8.5.4.1 Penetrant Equipment. Aerosol cans, air sary, to prevent drying. Precautions should be taken to
or CO2, powder spray guns, paint brushes, spraying, or prevent inspection materials from entering inaccessible
dipping may be used to apply the liquids. areas. It is permissible to remove excess penetrant prior
to application of the emulsifier by wiping with paper
8.5.4.2 Drying Equipment. Paper towels, lint-free towels or lint-free cloth.
cloths, or vacuum equipment may be used for drying.
8.5.5.5 Application of Remover. The remover
8.5.4.3 Lighting. The test area shall be adequately shall be applied by spraying or brushing.
illuminated for proper evaluation of the visual indica-
tions revealed on the test surface. 8.5.5.6 Removal of Excess Penetrant
(1) Wet Removal (Water Washable). After an
8.5.4.4 Fluorescent Penetrants. A darkened area emulsification time to exceed two minutes, the pene-
for black light use is necessary. The black light intensity trant-emulsified film shall be removed by a water spray.
should be 90 to 100 foot-candles in the 3650 Angstrom The water pressure shall not exceed 50 psi [345 kPa] and
wave length band. Allow 5 minutes for the black light the water temperature shall not be less than 40F [5C]
source to warm up to achieve the desired intensity. nor more than 110F [45C]. The spray shall be applied

87
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

at a distance of 10 to 15 in. [250 to 400 mm] from the 8.5.6 Acceptance Standards. All surfaces examined
surface. Washing should be continued until all traces of shall be free of linear indications in excess of 1/8 in.
surface penetrant have disappeared. Where restricted [3 mm]. These surfaces may have four or fewer,
areas prevent the use of a water spray, the penetrant- rounded indications in a line, edge to edge, separated by
emulsified film may be removed by repeated applica- 1/16 in. [2 mm], except where the specification for the
tions of dry or water-soaked paper towels or lint-free material establishes different requirements for acceptance.
cloths.
(2) Dry Removal (Solvent) 8.5.6.1 Linear indications are those indications in
(a) As much penetrant as possible shall be re- which the length is more than twice the width.
moved by first wiping the surface thoroughly with a
clean dry cloth or absorbent paper. 8.5.6.2 Defect Removal and Repair. See Section 9.
(b) The remaining excess penetrant shall be re-
moved by wiping the surface with a clean cloth or absor-
bent paper dampened with remover. Flushing of the 9. Repair
surface with any liquid, following application of the pen-
etrant and prior to developing, is prohibited. 9.1 Weld Repairs
(3) Postemulsifier Removal. With postemulsifier
penetrants, an additional step is required. This step is the 9.1.1 Overlap or Excessive Convexity. Excess weld
application of a liquid emulsifier prior to the rinsing metal shall be removed.
operation. The emulsifier may be applied by brushing,
spraying, or dipping. Emulsifying times of ten seconds to 9.1.2 Excessive Concavity of Weld or Crater and
five minutes can be used, depending upon prevailing Undersize Welds. Surfaces shall be prepared and addi-
conditions, such as surface roughness or the type of tional weld metal deposited with the original weld proce-
defect sought. The emulsifying time is critical. Once the dure. All slag shall be removed and the adjacent base
emulsifying time has been set for a particular test, it metal shall be clean before additional welding.
should not vary more than 10%. After emulsification,
9.1.3 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal. All cracks shall
the mixture is removed by a water spray, using the same
be removed (see 9.3) and the area rewelded with the
procedure as for water-washable liquid penetrants.
original weld procedure or a qualified repair procedure.
8.5.5.7 Application of Developer
(1) Dry. After the surface has been thoroughly dried, 9.1.4 Undercutting
the developer shall be applied by dipping, spraying, or
9.1.4.1 Undercutting may be repaired by grinding
brushing. Application of the developer by spraying is
and blending or by welding using a qualified welding
preferable. The surface shall be completely covered with
procedure. It is preferably done by careful grinding and
developer. It is suggested that the aerosol can or sprayer
blending. Grinding should be performed with a pencil-
be held 10 in. [250 mm] from the work and be applied in
type grinder. The grinding marks should be transverse to
short dusting strokes. The application of excessive devel-
the length of the weld, and have a 250 RMS finish or
oper should be avoided, since it is possible for a thick
better.
coating of developer to mask indications.
(2) Liquid. The liquid developer is a suspension of 9.1.4.2 Blending shall be done with a slope not to
powder in water or a volatile solvent. It is applied by dip- exceed 1 in 2.5. On plates of 1/2 in. [13 mm] thickness
ping, spraying, or brushing. In any case, a film of powder and above, up to 7% reduction of base material thickness
is left on the surface when the developer dries. Where a is permitted. Repair of undercut areas by grinding and
water suspension developer is used, drying time may be blending in excess of this amount may be permitted with
decreased by the use of warm air. the approval of the Engineer.
8.5.5.8 Examination. Visual examination of the
surface being inspected shall be made after a minimum 9.1.4.3 When undercut is to be repaired by weld-
of seven minutes and a maximum of thirty minutes after ing, the surfaces shall be prepared and then additional
developer has dried. Interpretation and acceptance shall weld metal shall be deposit using the original weld
be made according to 8.5.6. procedure.

8.5.5.9 Final Cleaning. When the inspection is 9.1.5 Incomplete Fusion, Excessive Weld Porosity,
concluded, the penetrant materials shall be removed as or Slag Inclusions. Defective portions shall be removed
soon as possible by means of brushing, flushing, or wip- (see 9.2.3) and rewelded with the original weld proce-
ing with paper towels or lint-free cloth. dure or a qualified repair procedure.

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

88
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

9.2 Base-Metal Repairs 9.2.3.3 The surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly


before welding. Defects that occur in material handling
9.2.1 Defects in Cut Edges of Plate. If a defect is that do not affect the structural integrity of the design can
found in a cut edge that exceeds the limits imposed in be repaired by grinding.
Table 20, it shall be removed and repaired in accordance
with 9.3. 9.2.3.4 Additional weld metal, when required, to
compensate for any deficiency in size, shall be deposited
9.2.2 Arc Strikes and Temporary Attachment
using a low-hydrogen process with the original weld pro-
Areas. Arc strikes and temporary welds in critical loca-
cedure or a qualified repair procedure.
tions, as defined by the Engineer, shall be removed and
ground smooth to assure that no abrupt change in section 9.2.4 Distortion and Camber. Members distorted by
exists. The smoothed area shall be inspected by an welding may be straightened by mechanical means, in
appropriate nondestructive testing method to assure that combination with, or by careful application of localized
there are no existing cracks or similar discontinuities. heat. The temperature of the heated area shall be mea-
Any cracks or similar discontinuities shall be repaired in sured by approved methods such as temperature indicat-
accordance with 9.3. ing crayons or contact pyrometers, and limited to that
permitted by the material being straightened. For
9.2.3 Removal of Defective Areas. The removal of
quenched and tempered, or normalized and tempered
weld metal or portions of the base metal may be done by
steels, the temperature shall not exceed the tempering
machining, grinding, chipping, oxygen gouging, or air
temperature minus 100F [55C], or 1200F [650C] for
carbon arc gouging. It shall be done in such a manner
other steels.
that the remaining weld metal or base metal is not nicked
or undercut. 9.2.5 Correction of Improperly Fitted and Welded
9.2.3.1 Oxygen gouging shall not be used on Members. If a weld is found to be unacceptable after
quenched-and-tempered steel. additional work, or new conditions make correction of
the unacceptable weld dangerous or ineffectual, the orig-
9.2.3.2 Defective portions of the weld shall be inal conditions shall be restored by removing welds or
removed without substantial removal of the base metal. members, or both, before the corrections are made. If this

Table 20
Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Cut Edge Discontinuities of Plate
Description of Discontinuity Repair Required

Any discontinuity 1 in. [25 mm] in length or less. None, need not be explored.

Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over None, but the depth should be explored.(1)
1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum depth.

Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over Remove, no need to reweld.
1/8 in. [3 mm] but not greater than 1/4 in. [6 mm].

Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over Completely remove and reweld with the original weld
1/4 in. [6 mm] but not greater than 1 in. [25 mm]. procedure or a qualified repair procedure. Aggregate length
of welding shall not exceed 20% of the length of the plate edge
being repaired.

Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth Completely remove and reweld with the original weld
greater than 1 in. [25 mm]. procedure or a qualified repair procedure. Aggregate length
of welding shall not exceed 20% of the length of the plate edge
being repaired.
Note:
(1) A spot check of 10% of the discontinuities on the oxygen-cut edge in question should be explored by grinding to determine depth. If the depth of
any one of the discontinuities explored exceeds 1/8 in. [3 mm], then all of the discontinuities remaining on that edge shall be explored by grinding
to determine depth. If none of the discontinuities explored in the 10% spot check have a depth exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm], then the remainder of the
discontinuities on that edge need not be explored.

89
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

is not done, the deficiency shall be compensated for by on the cut edge of the cut material shall be gouged out to
additional work performed according to an approved a depth of 1 in. [25 mm] beyond its intersection with the
revised design. Improperly fitted and welded members surface by chipping, air carbon arc gouging, or grinding,
require design engineer approval prior to cutting apart. and blocked off by welding with a low hydrogen process
Cutting is to be handled by methods similar to those in in layers not exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in thickness.
9.3.
9.2.5.3 If a discontinuity (Z), not exceeding the
9.2.5.1 Where discontinuities such as (W), (Y), or allowable area in 9.2.5.2 is discovered after the joint has
(X) in Figure 66 are observed prior to completing the been completed and is determined to be 1 in. [25 mm] or
joint, the size and shape of the discontinuity shall be more away from the face of the weld, as measured on the
determined by ultrasonic testing. The area of the discon- cut material surface, no repair of the discontinuity is
tinuity shall be determined as the area of total loss of required. If the discontinuity (Z) is less than 1 in.
back reflection, when tested in conformance to the [25 mm] away from the face of the weld, it shall be
procedure of ASTM A 435, Specification for Straight- gouged out to a distance of 1 in. [25 mm] from the fusion
Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates for zone of the weld by chipping, air carbon arc gouging, or
Pressure Vessels. grinding. It shall then be blocked off by welding with a
low-hydrogen process for at least four layers not exceed-
9.2.5.2 For acceptance, the area of the discontinu- ing 1/8 in. [3 mm] in thickness per layer.
ity (or the aggregate area of multiple discontinuities)
shall not exceed 4% of the cut material area (length 9.2.5.4 If the area of the discontinuity (W), (X),
width) with the following exception: if the length of dis- (Y), or (Z) exceeds the allowable area in 9.2.5.2, the cut
continuities on any transverse section, as measured per- material or subcomponent shall be rejected and replaced,
pendicular to the cut material length, exceeds 20% of the or repaired at the discretion of the Engineer.
cut material width, the 4% cut material area shall be
9.2.5.5 The aggregate length of weld repair shall
reduced by the percentage amount of the width exceed-
not exceed 20% of the length of the material edge with-
ing 20%. (For example, if a discontinuity is 30% of the
out approval of the Engineer.
cut material width, the area of discontinuity cannot
exceed 3.6% of the cut material area.) The discontinuity 9.2.5.6 All repairs shall be in conformance to this
specification. Backgouging of the discontinuity may be
done from either surface or edge.
9.3 Repair Procedure
9.3.1 The size of surface or subsurface defects shall
be determined and documented by means of suitable
nondestructive examination. The defects shall be com-
pletely removed.
9.3.2 Prior to rewelding, these areas shall be checked
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

by an appropriate inspection method, such as magnetic


particle or dye penetrant, to insure complete removal of
defective material.
9.3.3 After rewelding in accordance with an approved
repair welding procedure, the repaired areas are to be
reinspected per Section 8.

10. Postweld Treatments


10.1 Introduction
10.1.1 This section describes various postweld treat-
ments to condition the weldment prior to its introduction
into service. These treatments are designed to do one or
more of the following:
Figure 66Edge Discontinuities (1) Maintain dimensional stability,
in Cut Material (2) Reduce or redistribute residual stress,

90
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

(3) Improve the microstructure, shall not exceed 100F [55C] per hour until the weld-
(4) Improve fatigue life, or ment reaches the holding temperature. For other heat
(5) Improve mechanical properties. source methods, such as portable electric pads, the rate of
temperature rise shall not exceed 100F [55C] per hour.
10.1.2 The residual stress reduction methods dis-
cussed in this section are thermal, peening, and vibra- 10.2.6 Hold Cycle. Hold time and temperature shall
tory. Other postweld treatments and vibratory be approved by the Engineer.
conditioning can be applied only with the approval of the
Engineer. 10.2.7 Cooling Cycle. The weldment should be
cooled at a rate not exceeding 100F [55C] per hour
10.1.3 Residual stress reduction methods used to min- until the component reaches 300F [150C]. Blowers or
imize distortion of welded components will include, but fans shall not be used to increase the cooling rate during
not be limited to, those described in this section. the cooling cycle.

10.2 Thermal Residual Stress Reduction. Stresses cre- 10.2.8 Steels Not Recommended for Postweld Heat
ated during the manufacture of the welded components Treatment (PWHT). Stress relieving of weldments of
or which were residual in the base material may be A 514, A 517, A 709 Grades 100 and 100W, and A 710
reduced by thermal stress reduction methods such as fur- steels is generally not recommended. Stress relieving
naces, portable electric resistance heaters, and other con- may be necessary for those applications where weld-
trolled heat sources. Thermal stress reduction is a ments must retain dimensional stability during machin-
process which: ing or where stress corrosion may be involved, neither
(1) Raises the temperature of a metal at a controlled condition being unique to weldments involving A 514,
rate to an appropriate level for the metal (heating cycle); A 517, A 709 Grades 100 and 100W, and A 710 steels.
(2) Maintains that elevated temperature for a speci- However, the results of notch toughness tests have
fied time period (holding cycle); and shown that PWHT may actually impair weld metal and
(3) Lowers the temperature at a controlled rate (cool- heat-affected zone toughness, and intergranular cracking
ing cycle). may sometimes occur in the grain-coarsened region of
the weld heat-affected zone.
10.2.1 The weldment shall be adequately supported to
prevent sagging during stress reduction. 10.3 Peening

10.2.2 When two or more items are heated in a fur- 10.3.1 Shot Peening. Controlled shot peening may be
nace at the same time, they shall be spaced so that all employed to reduce surface tensile stresses. Controlled
pieces will heat uniformly. shot peening specifications shall apply.

10.2.3 Baffles or insulating material, when needed, 10.3.2 Mechanical Peening. Hammer or needle peen-
should be placed to protect the work from direct ing may be used on intermediate weld layers for control
impingement of heat source. of shrinkage stresses in thick welds to prevent cracking.
No peening shall be done on the root pass. Mechanical
10.2.4 The temperature shall be controlled and peening of the surface layer of the weld and the base
recorded from a thermocouple(s) that have surface con- metal at the edges of the weld is permitted for fatigue
tact with the welded component and are shielded from strength improvement. Controlled peening procedures
direct impingement of the heat source. Records shall should be used to prevent overlapping or cracking of the
include the location and calibration, of each thermocou- weld or base metal. All slag should be removed prior to
ple, along with traceable weldment identification such as hammer peening. The use of manual slag hammers, chis-
weldment name, part number, or serial number. The els and lightweight vibrating tools for the removal of slag
records and data shall become part of the weldment and spatter is permitted, but is not considered peening.
documentation.
10.3.3 Peening for Fatigue Strength Improvement.
10.2.5 Heating Cycle. The postweld heat treatment Under controlled conditions, both shot and mechanical
temperature shall be as specified by the Engineer. The peening places the surface material in compression
furnace shall not exceed 400F [205C] at the time the which reduces residual tensile stresses at the weld sur-
weldment is placed in it. After the temperature of the face, the toe of the weld and the base metal adjacent to
weldment reaches 400F [205C], the rate of heating the weld. Both shot and mechanical peening provide for

91 --`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

improved fatigue life in the weld joint as a result of the structures; however, the dimensional geometry, struc-
surface material being placed in compression.12, 13, 14 tural complexity and rigidity have a marked effect on
the success of the method employed. Vibrational con-
10.4 Vibratory Conditioning ditioning after welding is minimally effective (approx-
10.4.1 Vibrational conditioning has been used imately up to 15% reduction) in reducing residual
successfully to provide dimensional stability on some stress; but has been found to be moderately effective
during welding, to minimize distortion in mild steel
weldments.
12. Bremen, U., Smith, I. F. C., and Hirt, M. A.: Crack
Growth Behavior in a Welded Joint Improved by Residual
Stress Method, International Conference: Fatigue of Welded 10.4.2 Vibrational conditioning of welded structures
Construction: Maddos, S. J. (ed), The Welding Institute, to obtain dimensional stability for machining of the
Abington, Cambridge, 1987. weldment may be employed with the approval of the
13. Booth, G. S. (ed): Improving the Fatigue Performance of Engineer.
Welded Joints, The Welding Institute, Abington, Cambridge,
1983.
14. Metal Improvement Company, Inc.: Shot Peening Appli- 10.4.3 Vibrational conditioning is not to be substi-
cation, Eighth Edition. tuted for thermal stress relief.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

92
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Mandatory Annex

Annex I
Prequalified Weld Joints
(This Annex is a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005, Specification for Welded Joints in
Machinery and Equipment, and includes mandatory elements for use with this standard.)
Butt Joint (B)
Corner Joint (C)
Limited (L)
Square-Groove Weld (1)

Base Metal Groove Preparation Gas


Thickness, in. [mm] Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint (U = Unlimited) Tolerances, in. [mm] Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 Root Opening As Detailed As Fit Up Positions FCAW Notes
B-L1a 1/4 [6] max R = T1 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/4 [6], 1/16 [2] All N
SMAW
C-L1a 1/4 [6] max U R = T1 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/4 [6], 1/16 [2] All
GMAW Not
B-L1a-GF 3/8 [10] max R = T1 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/4 [6], 1/16 [2] All A, N
FCAW Required
(A)
Butt Joint (B)
Limited (L)
Square-Groove Weld (1)

Base Metal Groove Preparation Gas


Thickness, in. [mm] Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint (U = Unlimited) Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm] Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit Up Positions FCAW Notes

SMAW B-L1b 1/4 [6] max R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All C, N

GMAW Not A, C,
B-L1b-GF 3/8 [10] max R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All
FCAW Required N
SAW B-L1-S 3/8 [10] max R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Flat N
SAW B-L1a-S 5/8 [16] max R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Flat C, N
(B)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.

Figure I.1Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

93
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

T- or Corner Joint (TC)


Limited (L)
Square-Groove Weld (1)
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in. [mm] Gas
(U = Unlimited) Tolerances, in. [mm] Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit Up Positions FCAW Notes

SMAW TC-L1b 1/4 [6] max U R = T1/2 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All C, J

GMAW Not
TC-L1a-GF 3/8 [10] max U R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All A, C, J
FCAW Required
SAW TC-L1-S 3/8 [10] max U R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Flat C, J
(C)
Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm] for R; for
Unlimited (U) or
Limited (L) As Detailed As Fit Up
Single-V-Groove Weld (2) R = +1/16 [2], +1/4 [6],
0 1/16 [2]
= +10, 0 +10, 5

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation Gas
Permitted Shielding
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding for
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions(1) FCAW Notes
R = 1/4 [6] = 45 All
SMAW B-U2a U R = 3/8 [10] = 30 F, V, OH N
R = 1/2 [13] = 20 F, V, OH
R = 3/16 [5] = 30 F, V, OH Required
GMAW
B-U2a-GF U R = 1/4 [6] = 30 F, V, OH Not Req. A, N
FCAW
R = 3/8 [10] = 45 F, V, OH Not Req.
SAW B-L2a-S 2 [50] max R = 1/4 [6] = 30 F
N
SAW B-U2-S U R = 5/8 [16] = 20 F
(D)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

94
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Corner Joint (C) Tolerances, in. [mm] for R; for


Unlimited (U) or
As Detailed As Fit Up
Limited (L)
Single-V-Groove Weld (2) R = +1/16 [2], +1/4 [6],
0 1/16 [2]
= +10, 0 +10, 5

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions(1) for FCAW Notes
R = 1/4 [6] = 45 All
SMAW C-U2a U U R = 3/8 [10] = 30 F, V, OH Q
R = 1/2 [13] = 20 F, V, OH
R = 3/16 [5] = 30 F, V, OH Required A
GMAW
C-U2a-GF U U R = 3/8 [10] = 30 F, V, OH Not Req.
FCAW A, Q
R = 1/4 [6] = 45 F, V, OH Not Req.
SAW C-L2a-S 2 [50] max U R = 1/4 [6] = 30 F
Q
SAW C-U2-S U U R = 5/8 [16] = 20 F
(E)
Butt Joint (B)
Unlimited (U) or
Limited (L)
Single-V-Groove Weld (2)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
SMAW B-U2 U f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited All C, N
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
GMAW Not A, C,
B-U2-GF U f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited All
FCAW Required N
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
Over 1/2 [13]
f = 1/4 [6] max +0, f 1/16 [2]
to 1 [25]
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
Over 1 [25] to
SAW B-L2c-S f = 1/2 [13] max +0, f 1/16 [2] Flat C, N
1-1/2 [40]
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
Over 1-1/2
f = 5/8 [16] max +0, f 1/16 [2]
[40] to 2 [50]
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(F)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

95
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Corner Joint (C)


Unlimited (U)
Single-V-Groove Weld (2)

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in. Root Opening,
[mm] Root Face, Tolerances, in. [mm] Permitted Gas
Welding Joint (U = Unlimited) in. [mm] for R & f; for Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
SMAW C-U2 U U f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited All C, J, R
= 60 + 10, 0 +10, 5
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
GMAW Not A, C, J,
C-U2-GF U U f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited All
FCAW Required R
= 60 + 10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
SAW C-U2b-S U U f = 1/4 [6] max +0, 1/4 [6] 1/16 [2] Flat C, J, R
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(G)
Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm] for R, f, or
Unlimited (U) Spacer; for
Double-V-Groove Weld (3)
As Detailed As Fit Up
R = 0 +1/4 [6], 0
f = 0 +1/16 [2], 0
= +10, 0 +10, 5
SAW Spacer = 0 +1/16 [2], 0
SMAW Spacer = 0 +1/8 [3], 0

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions(1) for FCAW Notes
R = 1/4 [6]0 f = 0 to 1/8 [3] = 45 All
U
SMAW B-U3a R = 3/8 [10] f = 0 to 1/8 [3] = 30 F, V, OH C, M, N
Spacer = 1/8R
R = 1/2 [13] f = 0 to 1/8 [3] = 20 F, V, OH
U
SAW B-U3a-S R = 5/8 [16] f = 0 to 1/4 [6] = 20 F C, M, N
Spacer = 1/4R
(H)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45 to 135 for corner joints and from 45 to 90 for T-joints, provided
that the basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

96
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B) For B-U3c-S only, in. [mm]


Unlimited (U)
Double-V-Groove Weld (3) T1 S1
>2 [50] to 2-1/2 [60] 1-3/8 [35]
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

>2-1/2 [60] to 3 [75] 1-3/4 [45]


>3 [75] to 3-5/8 [90] 2-1/8 [55]
>3-5/8 [90] to 4 [100] 2-3/8 [60]
>4 [100] to 4-3/4 [120] 2-3/4 [70]
>4-3/4 [120] to 5-1/2 [140] 3-1/4 [80]
>5-1/2 [140] to 6-1/4 [160] 3-3/4 [95]

For T1 > 6-1/4 [160], or T1 2 [50]


S1 = 2/3 (T1 1/4 [6])

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in.
[mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U3b R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All C, M, N
GMAW U f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited Not A, C, M,
B-U3-GF = = 60 +10, 0 +10, 5 All
FCAW Required N
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
f = 1/4 [6] max +0, f +1/4 [6], 0
SAW B-U3c-S U = 60 +10, 0 +10, 5 Flat C, M, N
To find S1 see table above; S2 = T1 (S1 + f)
(I)
Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm] for R; for
Unlimited (U)
Single-Bevel-Groove Weld (4) As Detailed As Fit Up
R = +1/16 [2], 0 +1/4 [6], 1/16 [2]
= +10, 0 +10, 5

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions for FCAW Notes
R = 1/4 [6]0 = 45 All
SMAW B-U4a U Br, N
R = 3/8 [10] = 30 All
R = 3/16 [5] = 30 All Required
GMAW
B-U4a-GF U R = 1/4 [6]0 = 45 All Not Req. A, Br, N
FCAW
R = 3/8 [10] = 30 Flat Not Req.
(J)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br:Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

97
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

T- or Corner Joint (TC) Tolerances, in. [mm] for R; for


Unlimited (U)
Single-Bevel-Groove Weld (4) As Detailed As Fit Up
R = +1/16 [2], 0 +1/4 [6], 1/16 [2]
a = +10, 0 +10, 5

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding Gas Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] Groove Angle Positions(1) for FCAW Notes
R = 1/4 [6]0 = 45 All
SMAW TC-U4a U U J, Q, V
R = 3/8 [10] = 30 F, V, OH
R = 3/16 [5] = 30 All Required
GMAW A, J, Q,
TC-U4a-GF U U R = 3/8 [10] = 30 F Not Required
FCAW V
R = 1/4 [6]0 = 45 All Not Required
R = 3/8 [10] = 30
SAW TC-U4a-S U U F J, Q, V
R = 1/4 [6]0 = 45
(K)
Butt Joint (B)
Unlimited (U)
Single-Bevel-Groove Weld (4)

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in.
[mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U4b U R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All Br, C, N
GMAW f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited Not A, Br, C,
B-U4b-GF U = 45 +10, 0 10, 5 All
FCAW Required N
(L)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br:Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note Q: For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove angle is maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead, V = Vertical

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

98
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

T- or Corner Joint (TC)


Unlimited (U)
Single-Bevel-Groove Weld (4)

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
C, J, R,
SMAW TC-U4b U U R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All
V
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
GMAW Not A, C, J,
TC-U4b-GF U U = 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 All
FCAW Required R, V
R=0 0 +1/4 [6], 0
C, J, R,
SAW TC-U4b-S U U f = 1/4 [6] max +0, 1/8 [3] 1/16 [2] Flat
V
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(M)
Butt Joint (B)
Unlimited (U)
Double-Bevel-Groove Weld (5)

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for & Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited Br, C,
SMAW B-U5a U All
= 45 M, N
+ +10 + +10
= 0 to 15 0 5
R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 0
A, Br,
GMAW f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Not
B-U5-GF U All C, M,
FCAW = 45 Required
+ +10 + +10 N
= 0 to 15 0 5
(N)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br: Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45 to 135 for corner joints and from 45 to 90 for T-joints, provided
that the basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

99
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

T- or Corner Joint (TC)


Unlimited (U)
Double-Bevel-Groove Weld (5)

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Gas
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions for FCAW Notes
C, J, M,

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
SMAW TC-U5b U U R = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 +1/16 [2], 1/8 [3] All
R, V
f = 0 to 1/8 [3] +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
GMAW Not A, C, J,
TC-U5-GF U U = 45 + 10, 0 +10, 5 All
FCAW Required M, R, V
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
C, J, M,
SAW TC-U5-S U U f = 3/16 [5] max +0, 3/16 [5] 1/16 [2] Flat
R, V
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(O)
Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm]
T- or Corner Joint (TC) for R, f, & Spacer; for
Unlimited (U) As Detailed As Fit-Up
Double-Bevel-Groove Weld (5)
R = 0 +1/4 [6], 0
f = +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
= +10, 0 +10, 5
Spacer =
+1/8 [3], 0
+1/16 [2], 0
Spacer same steel as base metal.

Base Metal Thickness,


in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions for FCAW Notes
U Br, C,
B-U5b 1/4 [6]0 0 to 1/8 [3] = 45 All
Spacer = 1/8R M, N
C, J, M,
SMAW 1/4 [6]0 0 to 1/8 [3] = 45 All
U R, V
TC-U5a U
Spacer = 1/4R Flat, C, J, M,
3/8 [10] 0 to 1/8 [3] = 30
Overhead R, V
(P)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br:Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45 to 135 for corner joints and from 45 to 90 for T-joints, provided
that the basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

100
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm]


Corner Joint (C) for R, f, & r; for
Unlimited (U)
Single-U-Groove Weld (6) As Detailed As Fit Up
R = +1/16 [2],
+1/16 [2], 1/8 [3]
0
f = 1/16 [2] Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/8 [3], 0 +1/8 [3], 0

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Groove Radius (r) =
1/4 in. [6 mm] for all

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Gas Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions(1) for FCAW Notes
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All
B-U6 U U C, N
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 F, OH
SMAW
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All
C-U6 U U C, J, R
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 F, OH
GMAW B-U6-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 All Not Req. A, C, N
FCAW C-U6-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 All Not Req. A, C, J, R
(Q)
Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm]
Unlimited (U) for R, f, & r; for
Double-U-Groove Weld (7)
As Detailed As Fit Up
For B-U7 and B-U7-GF
+1/16 [2],
R = +1/16 [2], 0
1/8 [3]
f = 1/16 [2] Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Groove Radius (r) = For B-U7-S
1/4 in. [6 mm] for all R = 0 +1/16 [2], 0
f = +0, 1/4 [6] 1/16 [2]
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions(1) for FCAW Notes
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All C, M, N
SMAW B-U7 U
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 F, OH C, M, N
GMAW Not A, C,
B-U7-GF U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 20 All
FCAW Required M,N
SAW B-U7-S U R=0 1/4 [6] max = 20 F C, M, N
(R)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45 to 135 for corner joints and from 45 to 90 for T-joints, provided
that the basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

101
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm]


Unlimited (U) for R, f, & r; for
Single-J-Groove Weld (8)
As Detailed As Fit Up
+1/16 [2],
R = +1/16 [2], 0
1/8 [3]
f = +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]

Groove Radius (r) =


3/8 in. [10 mm] for all

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions for FCAW Notes
SMAW B-U8 U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All Br, C, N
GMAW A, Br, C,
B-U8-GF U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All Not Req.
FCAW N
(S)
T- or Corner Joint (TC) Tolerances, in. [mm]
Unlimited (U) for R, f, & r; for
Single-J-Groove Weld (8)
As Detailed As Fit Up
+1/16 [2],
R = +1/16 [2], 0
1/8 [3]
f = +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]

Groove Radius (r) =


3/8 in. [10 mm] for all

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions (1) for FCAW Notes
0 to 1/8 [3] f = 1/8 [3] = 45 All C, J, R,
SMAW TC-U8a U U
0 to 1/8 [3] f = 1/8 [3] = 30 F, OH V
GMAW Not A, C, J,
TC-U8a-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] f = 1/8 [3] = 30 All
FCAW Required R, V
(T)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br:Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Note R: The orientation of two members in the joints may vary from 45 to 135 for corner joints and from 45 to 90 for T-joints, provided
that the basic joint configuration (grove angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
(1) F = Flat, OH = Overhead

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

102
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B) Tolerances, in. [mm]


Unlimited (U) for R, f, & r; for
Double-J-Groove Weld (9)
As Detailed As Fit Up
+1/16 [2], 1/8
R = +1/16 [2], 0
[3]
f = +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/8 [3], 0 1/16 [2]

Groove Radius (r) =


3/8 in. [10 mm] for all

Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation
Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions for FCAW Notes
Br, C, M,
SMAW B-U9 U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All
N
GMAW Not A, Br, C,
B-U9-GF U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 30 All
FCAW Required M, N
(U)
T- or Corner Joint (TC) Tolerances, in. [mm]
Unlimited (U) for R, f, & r; for
Double-J-Groove Weld (9)
As Detailed As Fit Up
+1/16 [2],
R = +1/16 [2], 0
1/8 [3]
f = +1/16 [2], 0 Not Limited
= +10, 0 +10, 5
r = +1/8 [3], 0 1/16 [2]

Groove Radius (r) =


3/8 in. [10 mm] for all
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Groove Preparation Permitted Gas
Welding Joint Root Opening, Root Face, Groove Welding Shielding
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] in. [mm] Angle Positions for FCAW Notes
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 45 All

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
C, J, M, R,
SMAW TC-U9a U U Flat,
0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 30 V
Overhead
GMAW Not A, C, J, M,
TC-U9a-GF U U 0 to 1/8 [3] 1/8 [3] = 30 All
FCAW Required R, V
(V)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note Br:Dynamic load application limits these joints to the horizontal welding position.
Note C: Backgouge root to sound metal before welding second side.
Note J: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm]. Groove welds in corner and T-joints of cyclically loaded structures shall be rein-
forced with fillet welds equal to 1/4T1 , but need not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note M: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be no less than one-
fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined.
Note N: The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135 to 180 provided that the basic joint configuration (groove
angle, root face, root opening) remain the same and that the design weld size is maintained.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.

Figure I.1 (Continued)Prequalified Complete Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

103
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Square-Groove Weld (1)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Tolerances, in. [mm] Permitted Weld
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
B-P1a 1/8 [3] R = 0 to 1/16 [2] +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2] All T1 1/32 [1] B
SMAW
B-P1c 1/4 [6] max R = T1 /2 minimum +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2] All T1 /2 B

(A)
Butt Joint (B)
Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Square-Groove Weld (1)

E1 + E2 MUST NOT EXCEED 3T1 /4

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness, Total
in. [mm] Tolerances, in. [mm] Permitted Weld Size
Welding Joint Root Opening, Welding (E1 + E2 ),
Process Designation T1 T2 in. [mm] As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

SMAW B-P1b 1/4 [6] max R = T1 /2 minimum +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2] All 3T1 /4 C2

(B)
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note C2: Root need not be gouged before welding other side.

Figure I.2Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

104
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt or Corner Joint (BC)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Single-V-Groove Weld (2)
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
SMAW BC-P2 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min 1/16 [2] 1/16 [2] All S B, E, Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
GMAW A, B, E,
BC-P2-GF 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min 1/16 [2] 1/16 [2] All S
FCAW Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
7/16 [11]
SAW BC-P2-S U f = 1/4 [6] min 1/16 [2] 1/16 [2] Flat S B, E, Q2
min
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(C)

Butt Joint (B)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Double-V-Groove Weld (3)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
in. [mm] Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
E, Mp,
SMAW B-P3 1/2 [13] min f = 1/8 [3] min 0 1/16 [2] All S1 + S 2
Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
GMAW A, E,
B-P3-GF 1/2 [13] min f = 1/8 [3] min 0 1/16 [2] All S1 + S 2
FCAW Mp, Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +3/16 [5], 0
E, Mp,
SAW B-P3-S 3/4 [20] min f = 1/4 [6] min 0 1/16 [2] Flat S1 + S 2
Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(D)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the weld size (E), less any
reduction, applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

105
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt, T-, or Corner Joint (BTC)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Single-Bevel-Groove Weld (4)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
B, E, J2,
SMAW BTC-P4 U U f = 1/8 [3] min 0(1) 1/16 [2] All S
Q2, V
= 45 +10, 0 +10, 5
Flat,
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2] S A, B, E,
GMAW Horizontal
BTC-P4-GF 1/4 [6] min U f = 1/8 [3] min 0(1) 1/16 [2] J2, Q2,
FCAW Vertical,
= 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 S1/8 [3] V
Overhead
R=0 0 +3/16 [5], 0
B, E, J2,
SAW TC-P4-S 7/16 [11] min U f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] Flat S
Q2, V
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5
(E)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
(1) For flat and horizontal positions, f = +U, 0.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- 106
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt, T-, or Corner Joint (BTC)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Double-Bevel-Groove Weld (5)

Base Metal Groove Preparation


Thickness,
in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R & f; for Permitted Effective
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Throat (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2] E, J2, L,
(S1 + S2)
SMAW BTC-P5 5/16 [8] min U f = 1/8 [3] min U(1) 1/16 [2] All Mp, Q2
1/4 [6]
= 45 + 10, 0 +10, 5 V
Flat,
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2] S1 + S 2 A, E, J2,
GMAW Horizontal
BTC-P5-GF 1/2 [13] min U f = 1/8 [3] min U(1) 1/16 [2] L, Mp,
FCAW Vertical, (S1 + S2)
= 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 Q2, V
Overhead 1/4 [6]

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 E, J2, L,
SAW TC-P5-S 3/4 [20] min U f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] Flat S1 + S 2 Mp, Q2
= 60 +10, 0 +10, 5 V
(F)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note L: Butt and T-joints are not prequalified for dynamically loaded structures.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the weld size (E), less any
reduction, applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
(1) For flat and horizontal positions, f = +U, 0.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

107
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt or Corner Joint (BC)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Single-U-Groove Weld (6)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R, f, & r; for
Groove Radius, Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
f = 1/32 [1] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] B, E,
SMAW BC-P6 1/4 [6] min U All S
r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Q2
= 45 + 10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
GMAW f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] A, B,
BC-P6-GF 1/4 [6] min U All S
FCAW r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] E, Q2
= 20 + 10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
7/16 [11] f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] B, E,
SAW BC-P6-S U Flat S
min r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Q2
= 20 + 10, 0 +10, 5
(G)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note B: Joint is welded from one side only.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

108
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B)


Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Double-U-Groove Weld (7)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R, f, & r; for
Groove Radius, Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
1/2 [13] min
(5/8 [16] min R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
for f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] E, Mp,
SMAW B-P7 All S1 + S 2
dynamically r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Q2
loaded = 45 + 10, 0 +10, 5
applications)
1/2 [13] min
(5/8 [16] min R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
GMAW for f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] A, E,
B-P7-GF All S1 + S 2
FCAW dynamically r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Mp, Q2
loaded = 20 + 10, 0 +10, 5
applications)
3/4 [20] min
(7/8 [22] min R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
for f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] E, Mp,
SAW B-P7-S Flat S1 + S 2
dynamically r = 1/4 [6] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Q2
loaded = 20 + 10, 0 +10, 5
applications)
(H)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the weld size (E), less any
reduction, applies individually to each groove.
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

109
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt or Corner Joint (BC)


T- or Corner Joint (TC)
Corner Joint (C)
Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Single-J-Groove Weld (8)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R, f, & r; for
Groove Radius, Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
TC-P8 f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
(T and Inside 1/4 [6] min U All S
r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner Joints) = 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 E, J2,
SMAW
BC-P8 R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2] Q2, V
(Butt and f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
1/4 [6] min U All S
Outside r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner Joints) = 30 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2]
TC-P8-GF
f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
(T and Inside 1/4 [6] min U All S
r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner Joints)
GMAW = 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 A, E, J2,
FCAW BC-P8-GF R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 +1/8 [3], 1/16 [2] Q2, V
(Butt and f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
1/4 [6] min U All S
Outside r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner Joints) = 30 +10, 0 +10, 5
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0


TC-P8-S
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
(T- and Inside 7/16 [11] min U Flat S
r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner)
= 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 E, J2,
SAW
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Q2, V
C-P8-S
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
(Outside 7/16 [11] min U Flat S
r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Corner)
= 20 +10, 0 +10, 5
(I)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

110
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt Joint (B)


T-Joint (T)
Corner Joint (C)
Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Double-J-Groove Weld (9)

Groove Preparation
Base Metal
Thickness, in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R, f, & r; for
Groove Radius, Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
BTC-P9 R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
E, J2,
(Butt- T-, and f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
SMAW 1/2 [13] min U All S1 + S 2 Mp,
Inside Cor- r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Q2, V
ner Joints) = 45 +10, 0 +10, 5
BTC-P9-GF R=0 +1/16 [2], 0 1/16 [2]
A, E,
GMAW (Butt- T-, and f = 1/8 [3] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
1/2 [13] min U All S1 + S 2 J2, Mp,
FCAW Outside Cor- r = 3/8 [10] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Q2, V
= 30

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ner Joints) +10, 0 +10, 5
C-P9-S R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
(Inside f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
3/4 [20] min U Flat S1 + S 2
Corner r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Joints) = 45 +10, 0 +10, 5 E, J2,
Mp,
C-P9-S R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0 Q2, V
(Outside f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2]
SAW 3/4 [20] min U Flat S1 + S 2
Corner r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2]
Joints) = 20 +10, 0 +10, 5
R=0 0 +1/16 [2], 0
f = 1/4 [6] min +U, 0 1/16 [2] E, J2,
T-P9-S 3/4 [20] min U Flat S1 + S 2
r = 1/2 [13] +1/4 [6], 0 1/16 [2] Mp, Q2
= 45 +10, 0 +10, 5
(J)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note E: Minimum weld size (E) as shown in Table 10; S as specified on drawings.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note Mp: Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform to Note E. Also, the weld size (E), less any
reduction, applies individually to each groove.
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note V: For corner joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is
not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

111
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Butt, T-, or Corner Joint (BTC)


T-Joint (T)
Partial Joint Penetration (P)
Flare-Bevel-Groove Weld (10)
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Groove Preparation
Base Metal Thickness,
in. [mm] Root Opening, Tolerances, in. [mm]
(U = Unlimited) Root Face, for R, f, & r; for
Groove Radius, Permitted Weld
Welding Joint in. [mm] Welding Size (E),
Process Designation T1 T2 T3 Groove Angle As Detailed As Fit Up Positions in. [mm] Notes
1/8 [3]
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0
3/16 T1 1/16 [2] J2, Q2,
SMAW BTC-P10 U f = 3/16 [5] min +U, 0 All 5T1 /8
[5] min min +U, 1/16 [2] Z
C = 3T1 /2 min +U, 0
+U, 0
1/8 [3]
R=0 +1/16 [2], 0
GMAW 3/16 T1 1/16 [2] A, J2,
BTC-P10-GF U f = 3/16 [5] min +U, 0 All 5T1 /8
FCAW [5] min min +U, 1/16 [2] Q2, Z
C = 3T1 /2 min +U, 0
+U, 0
1/8 [3]
1/2 R=0 0
1/2 [13] 1/16 [2] J2, Q2,
SAW T-P10-S [13] NA f = 1/2 [13] min +U, 0 Flat 5T1 /8
min +U, 1/16 [2] Z
min C = 3T1 /2 min +U, 0
+U, 0
(K)
Note A: Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuiting transfer.
Note J2: If fillet welds are used in statically loaded structures to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to
1/4T1 , but not exceed 3/8 in. [10 mm].
Note Q2: The member orientation may be changed provided that the groove dimensions are maintained as specified.
Note Z: Weld size (E) is based on joints welded flush.
(1) For cold formed (A500) rectangular tubes, C dimension is not limited.

Figure I.2 (Continued)Prequalified Partial Joint Penetration Groove Welded Joints

112
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Nonmandatory Annexes

Annex A
Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries
for AWS Technical Committees
(This Annex is not a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005, Specification for Welded Joints
in Machinery and Equipment, but is included for informational purposes only.)

A1. Introduction with the edition of the standard that contains the provi-
sions or that the Inquirer is addressing.
The AWS Board of Directors has adopted a policy
whereby all official interpretations of AWS standards A2.2 Purpose of the Inquiry. The purpose of the
will be handled in a formal manner. Under that policy, all inquiry must be stated in this portion of the inquiry. The
interpretations are made by the committee that is respon- purpose can be either to obtain an interpretation of a
sible for the standard. Official communication concern- standards requirement, or to request the revision of a
ing an interpretation is through the AWS staff member particular provision in the standard.
who works with that committee. The policy requires that A2.3 Content of the Inquiry. The inquiry should be
all requests for an interpretation be submitted in writing. concise, yet complete, to enable the committee to quickly
Such requests will be handled as expeditiously as possi- and fully understand the point of the inquiry. Sketches
ble, but due to the complexity of the work and the proce- should be used when appropriate and all paragraphs, fig-
dures that must be followed, some interpretations may ures, and tables (or the Annex) which bear on the inquiry
require considerable time. must be cited. If the point of the inquiry is to obtain a
revision of the standard, the inquiry must provide techni-
cal justification for that revision.
A2. Procedure A2.4 Proposed Reply. The inquirer should, as a pro-
All inquiries must be directed to: posed reply, state an interpretation of the provision that
is the point of the inquiry, or the wording for a proposed
Managing Director, Technical Services revision, if that is what inquirer seeks.
American Welding Society
550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126 A3. Interpretation of Provisions of
All inquiries must contain the name, address, and the Standard
affiliation of the inquirer, and they must provide enough
Interpretations of provisions of the standard are made
information for the committee to fully understand the
by the relevant AWS Technical Committee. The secre-
point of concern in the inquiry. Where that point is not
tary of the committee refers all inquiries to the chairman
clearly defined, the inquiry will be returned for clarifica-
of the particular subcommittee that has jurisdiction over
tion. For efficient handling, all inquiries should be type-
the portion of the standard addressed by the inquiry. The
written and should also be in the format used here.
subcommittee reviews the inquiry and the proposed reply
A2.1 Scope. Each inquiry must address one single provi- to determine what the response to the inquiry should be.
sion of the standard, unless the point of the inquiry Following the subcommittees development of the
involves two or more interrelated provisions. That provi- response, the inquiry and the response are presented to
sion must be identified in the scope of the inquiry, along the entire committee for review and approval. Upon

113
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

approval by the committee, the interpretation will be an obtained only through a written request. The Headquar-
official interpretation of the Society, and the secretary ters staff cannot provide consulting services. The staff
will transmit the response to the inquirer and to the Weld- can, however, refer a caller to any of those consultants
ing Journal for publication. whose names are on file at AWS Headquarters.

A4. Publication of Interpretations A6. The AWS Technical Committee


All official interpretations will appear in the Welding The activities of AWS Technical Committees regard-
Journal. ing interpretations are limited strictly to the interpreta-
tion of provisions of standards prepared by the
Committee or to consideration of revisions to existing
A5. Telephone Inquiries provisions on the basis of new data or technology. Nei-
ther the committee nor the staff is in a position to offer
Telephone inquiries to AWS Headquarters concern- interpretive or consulting services on: (1) specific engi-
ing AWS standards should be limited to questions of a neering problems; or (2) requirements of standards
general nature or to matters directly related to the use of applied to fabrications outside the scope of the document
the standard. The Board of Directors policy requires that or points not specifically covered by the standard. In
all AWS staff members respond to a telephone request such cases, the inquirer should seek assistance from a
for an official interpretation of any AWS standard with competent engineer experienced in the particular field of
the information that such an interpretation can be interest.

114
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

Annex B
Bibliography
(This Annex is not a part of AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005, Specification for Welded Joints
in Machinery and Equipment, but is included for informational purposes only.)

B1. American Welding Society (2) ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding and Cutting and
Allied Processes. (Published by AWS)
(AWS) References
(1) AWS A1.1, Metric Practice Guide for the Weld-
ing Industry
B5. American Society of Mechanical

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(2) AWS A5.01, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines Engineers (ASME)
(3) AWS B2.1-x-xxx, Standard Welding Procedure
(1) ASME B46.1, Surface Texture (Surface Rough-
Specifications
ness, Waviness, and Lay)
(4) AWS F4.1, Recommended Safe Practices for the
Preparation for Welding and Cutting of Containers and (2) ASME Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
Piping That Have Held Hazardous Substances. sel CodeSection IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B2. American Association of State B6. American Society of Testing and


Highway & Transportation Materials (ASTM)
Officials (AASHTO) (1) ASTM E 390, Reference Radiographs for Steel
(1) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. Fusion Welds.

B3. American Institute of Steel B7. Canadian Standards Association


Construction, Inc. (AISC) (CSA)
(1) AISC 335, Specification for Structural Steel
(1) W178.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors.
Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design.

B4. American National Standards B8. Compressed Gas Association


Institute (ANSI) (CGA)
(1) ANSI Z87.1, Practice for Occupational and Edu- (1) Publication P-1, Safe Handling of Compressed
cational Eye and Face Protection. Gases in Containers.

115
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

This page is intentionally blank.

116
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

List of AWS Documents on Machinery and Equipment

Designation Title
D14.1/D14.1M Specification for Welding Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other Material Handling Equipment
D14.3/D14.3M Specification for Welding Earthmoving, Construction, and Agricultural Equipment
D14.4/D14.4M Specification for Welded Joints in Machinery and Equipment
D14.5/D14.5M Specification for Welding of Presses and Press Components
D14.6/D14.6M Specification for Welding of Rotating Elements of Equipment
D14.7/D14.7M Recommended Practices for Surfacing and Reconditioning of Industrial Mill Rolls

--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

117
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
AWS D14.4/D14.4M:2005

This page is intentionally blank.


--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

118
Copyright American Welding Society
Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT
--`,,`,`,,,``,`,`,,,``,,````,`,-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Copyright American Welding Society


Provided by IHS under license with AWS Licensee=Technip/5931917102
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 09/28/2005 02:52:02 MDT

You might also like